625538

Dethleffs 2010 Motorhome Premium Class Handleiding

1
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/220
Pagina verder
Instruction manual
Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
© 2009 Dethleffs GmbH & Co. KG, Isny
Instruction manual
Congratulations
We congratulate you on your new motorhome and would like to thank you for choosing a quality product from
Dethleffs.
Whether you want to enjoy your holidays on good or bad roads, whether you want to have your "holiday home"
out in the country, at the seaside or in the mountains: Your Dethleffs motorhome will always make sure that
you can enjoy your holidays because the Dethleffs team has been building caravans for more than seventy
years and knows what is important. This experience shows itself in the well thought-out, cosy and yet highly
functional equipment as well as in the outstanding driving characteristics.
Each Dethleffs vehicle is manufactured with great care and the quality is closely checked. This ensures that
our products have a long service life. In view of these strict requirements, we guarantee top quality of our prod-
ucts and grant you a six year leakage guarantee of the body in accordance with our guarantee conditions (see
section 1.2).
This instruction manual deals primarily with the body of your motorhome. It will give you all important informa-
tion and tips so that you can enjoy all technical advantages of your Dethleffs motorhome to the full. We have
also included a chapter on maintenance – and thus on the conservation of value.
In addition, you will find the documents on the base vehicle and the various built-in appliances.
For maintenance work or whenever you need some help, please always get in touch with your authorised spe-
cialist workshop. They know your motorhome best of all, and will meet all your requests fast and reliably.
We wish you a lot of fun with your motorhome, a relaxing holiday and safe driving at all times.
Your Dethleffs team
Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Instruction manual
3Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Contents
1 Guarantee. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.1 Guarantee certificate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.2 Guarantee conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.3 Inspection records. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.4 Inspection plan for
annual inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
1.5 Inspection plan for
water ingress test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.2 Environmental tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3.1 Fire prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3.1.1 Avoidance of fire risks. . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3.1.2 Fire-fighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3.1.3 In case of fire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3.2 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.3 Road safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.4 Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3.5 Gas system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3.5.1 General instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3.5.2 Gas bottles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3.6 Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3.7 Water system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
4 Before the journey . . . . . . . . . . . 25
4.1 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
4.2 Registration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
4.3 Payload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
4.3.1 Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
4.3.2 Calculating the payload. . . . . . . . . . . . 28
4.3.3 Loading the vehicle correctly. . . . . . . . 29
4.3.4 Roof load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
4.3.5 Rear garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
4.3.6 Double floor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
4.3.7 Sliding drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
4.3.8 Bike rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
4.4 Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
4.5 Entrance step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
4.6 PVC-floor covering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
4.7 Television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
4.8 Sink cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
4.9 Roman shades for driver's window
and front passenger's window . . . . . . 38
4.10 Central locking system for
kitchen unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
4.11 Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
4.12 Road safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
5 During the journey . . . . . . . . . . . 41
5.1 Driving the motorhome . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
5.2 Reversing camera. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
5.3 Driving speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
5.4 Brakes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
5.5 Seat belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
5.5.1 Fastening the seat belt correctly . . . . . 43
5.6 Driver's seat and front
passenger's seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
5.7 Headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
5.8 Seating arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
5.9 Electrically adjustable
external mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
5.10 Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
5.11 Pneumatic spring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
5.11.1 Pneumatic spring (Goldschmidt) . . . . . 48
5.11.2 Pneumatic spring
(VB-airsuspension) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
5.12 Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
5.13 Filliing with washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . 52
5.14 Refilling cooling water . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
5.15 Filling up with diesel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
6 Pitching the motorhome. . . . . . 55
6.1 Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
6.2 Entrance step. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
6.3 Wheel chocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
6.4 Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
6.4.1 General instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
6.4.2 Steady legs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
6.4.3 Electrical steady legs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
6.4.4 Electrical-hydraulic steady legs . . . . . . 58
6.5 240 V connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
6.6 Awning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
7Living . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
7.1 Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
7.1.1 Conversion door, outside. . . . . . . . . . . 64
7.1.2 Conversion door, outside (Hartal) . . . . 64
7.1.3 Conversion door, inside . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
7.1.4 Conversion door, inside (Hartal) . . . . . 65
7.1.5 Window conversion door . . . . . . . . . . . 65
7.1.6 Window of conversion door
(Hartal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
7.1.7 Folding insect screen on
the conversion door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
7.2 External flaps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
7.2.1 Flap lock with recessed handle . . . . . . 67
7.2.2 Flap lock with separate
locking cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
7.2.3 Sliding drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
7.3 Driver's cabin partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
7.4 Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
7.5 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
7.5.1 Hinged window with automatic hinges
(with safety knob). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
7.5.2 Sliding window with lock . . . . . . . . . . . 72
7.5.3 Sliding window without lock . . . . . . . . . 73
7.5.4 Gathered blinds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
7.5.5 Blind and insect screen . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
7.5.6 Roman shade and insect screen . . . . . 74
Contents
4 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
7.5.7 Blind for the windscreen. . . . . . . . . . . . 75
7.5.8 Roman shades for driver's window
and front passenger's window . . . . . . . 76
7.6 Skylights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
7.6.1 Skylight with snap latch . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
7.6.2 Hinged skylight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
7.6.3 Heki skylight (mini and midi) . . . . . . . . 79
7.6.4 Wind-up skylight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
7.7 Rotating seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
7.8 Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
7.8.1 Suspension table with folding
table-top extension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
7.8.2 Fixed table (movable table-top) . . . . . . 82
7.9 Central locking system for
kitchen unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
7.10 Television. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
7.11 Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
7.12 Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
7.13 Light control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
7.14 Remote control for awning light,
canopy light and entrance step . . . . . . 86
7.15 Extending the seating group . . . . . . . . 87
7.15.1 Extending the central
seating group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
7.15.2 Extending the central
seating group with divan . . . . . . . . . . . 88
7.16 Beds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
7.16.1 Overcab bed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
7.16.2 Pull-down bed,
electronically lowerable . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
7.16.3 Fixed bed (gas-pressure springs) . . . . 91
7.17 Converting seating groups
for sleeping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
7.17.1 Central seating group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
7.17.2 Central seating group
with extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
7.17.3 Central seating group with divan . . . . . 94
8 Gas system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
8.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
8.2 Gas bottles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
8.3 Gas consumption. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
8.4 Changing gas bottles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
8.5 Gas isolator taps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
8.6 Hose break guard
(crash protection unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
8.7 External gas connection . . . . . . . . . . . 99
8.8 Duomatic switching facility. . . . . . . . . 100
8.9 DuoControl switching facility . . . . . . . 102
9 Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
9.1 General safety instructions . . . . . . . . 105
9.2 Terms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
9.3 12 V power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
9.3.1 Living area battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
9.4 Charging the living area battery
and starter battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
9.4.1 Charging using a
240 V power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
9.4.2 Charging using the vehicle engine . . .108
9.4.3 Charging with an external charger . . .108
9.5 AC converter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
9.6 Auxiliary charging unit . . . . . . . . . . . .110
9.7 Transformer/rectifier (EBL 220) . . . . .110
9.7.1 Battery separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
9.7.2 Battery selector switch . . . . . . . . . . . .112
9.7.3 Battery monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
9.7.4 Charging the battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
9.8 Panel MP 20-T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
9.8.1 240 V indicator lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
9.8.2 12 V main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
9.8.3 Batteries gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
9.8.4 Tank gauge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
9.8.5 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
9.8.6 Temperature display. . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
9.8.7 Clock gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
9.8.8 Switch for tank heater. . . . . . . . . . . . .118
9.9 240 V power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
9.9.1 240 V connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
9.9.2 Power cable for external
240 V connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
9.10 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
9.10.1 12 V fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
9.10.2 240 V fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
10 Appliances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
10.1 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
10.2 Alde hot-water heater . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
10.2.1 Alde heat exchanger. . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
10.2.2 Alde auxiliary circulating pump . . . . .127
10.2.3 Setting the rotational speed of
the circulating pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
10.3 Independent vehicle heater . . . . . . . .128
10.4 Alde boiler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
10.4.1 Switching the boiler on/off . . . . . . . . .129
10.4.2 Filling/emptying the boiler. . . . . . . . . .129
10.5 Cooker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
10.5.1 Gas cooker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
10.5.2 Gas oven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
10.5.3 Microwave oven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
10.5.4 Extractor hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
10.6 Refrigerator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
10.6.1 Refrigerator ventilation grill. . . . . . . . .134
10.6.2 Operation (Dometic 7 series
with automatic power selection
and frame heater). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
10.6.3 Operation (Kissmann). . . . . . . . . . . . .137
10.6.4 Refrigerator door
locking mechanism. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
10.7 Air conditioning unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
10.8 Dishwasher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
10.9 Central vacuum cleaner . . . . . . . . . . .142
5Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Contents
11 Sanitary fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
11.1 Water supply, general . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
11.2 Water tank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
11.2.1 Drinking water filler neck
with cap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
11.2.2 Water drainage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
11.2.3 Filling with water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
11.2.4 Draining water. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
11.3 Waste water tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
11.4 Odour seal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
11.5 Filling the water system. . . . . . . . . . . 149
11.6 Emptying the water system. . . . . . . . 150
11.7 Toilet compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
11.8 Toilet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
11.8.1 Swivel toilet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
11.8.2 Vacuum toilet (Dometic) . . . . . . . . . . 152
11.8.3 Removing the cassette . . . . . . . . . . . 153
11.8.4 Emptying the cassette. . . . . . . . . . . . 154
12 Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
12.1 External care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
12.1.1 Washing with a
high-pressure cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
12.1.2 Washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
12.1.3 Windows of acrylic glass. . . . . . . . . . 156
12.1.4 Underbody. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
12.1.5 Waste water tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
12.1.6 Entrance step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
12.1.7 Driver's cabin insulation mat
(model I) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
12.1.8 Electrical-hydraulic steady legs. . . . . 157
12.2 Interior care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
12.3 Water system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
12.3.1 Cleaning the water tank . . . . . . . . . . 158
12.3.2 Cleaning the water pipes. . . . . . . . . . 159
12.3.3 Disinfecting the water system . . . . . . 159
12.4 Extractor hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
12.5 Vacuum toilet (Dometic) . . . . . . . . . . 160
12.6 Winter care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
12.6.1 Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
12.6.2 Winter operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
12.6.3 At the end of the winter season. . . . . 162
12.7 Lay-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
12.7.1 Temporary lay-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
12.7.2 Winter lay-up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
12.7.3 Starting up the vehicle after
a temporary lay-up or after
lay-up over winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
13 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
13.1 Inspection work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
13.2 Maintenance work. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
13.3 Electrical-hydraulic steady legs. . . . . 168
13.4 Alde hot-water heater . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
13.4.1 Checking the fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . 168
13.4.2 Topping up heating fluid . . . . . . . . . . 169
13.4.3 Bleeding the heating system. . . . . . . 169
13.5 Independent vehicle heater . . . . . . . . 169
13.6 Air conditioning unit (Truma) . . . . . . . 169
13.7 Central vacuum cleaner. . . . . . . . . . . 170
13.8 Replacing bulbs and
fluorescent tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
13.8.1 Halogen spotlight (movable) . . . . . . . 171
13.8.2 Room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
13.8.3 Recessed halogen light
with housing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
13.8.4 Recessed halogen light
(swivelling). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
13.8.5 Recessed halogen light (flat) . . . . . . . 173
13.8.6 Wardrobe light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
13.8.7 Garage light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
13.8.8 Refrigerator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
13.9 Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
13.10 Vehicle identification plate . . . . . . . . . 176
13.11 Warning and information stickers . . . 176
14 Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
14.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
14.2 Tyre selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
14.3 Tyre specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
14.4 Handling of tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
14.5 Changing wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
14.6 Spare wheel support . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
14.7 Tyre pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
15 Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
15.1 Braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
15.2 Pneumatic spring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
15.2.1 Pneumatic spring (Goldschmidt) . . . . 183
15.2.2 Pneumatic spring
(VB-airsuspension) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
15.3 Electrical-hydraulic steady legs . . . . . 185
15.4 Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
15.5 Light control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
15.6 Gas system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
15.7 Cooker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
15.7.1 Gas cooker/gas oven. . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
15.7.2 Microwave oven. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
15.8 Heater/boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
15.9 Refrigerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
15.9.1 Refrigerator with AES . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
15.9.2 Kissmann refrigerator . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
15.10 Air conditioning unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
15.11 Dishwasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
15.12 Water supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
15.13 Vacuum toilet (Dometic) . . . . . . . . . . 194
15.14 Body. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
16 Special equipment. . . . . . . . . . . 197
16.1 Weight details for
special equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Contents
6 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
17 Helpful notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
17.1 Traffic rules in foreign countries. . . . . 199
17.2 Help on Europe's roads . . . . . . . . . . . 199
17.3 Speed limits and
permissible dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . 201
17.4 Driving with low beam in
European countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
17.5 Sleeping in the vehicle away
from camping areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
17.6 Gas supply in
European countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
17.7 Toll regulations in
European countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
17.8 Tips on staying overnight
safely during travel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
17.9 Tips for winter campers . . . . . . . . . . . 207
17.10 Travel checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
7Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Guarantee
1
1Guarantee
1.1 Guarantee certificate
We reserve the right to alter the construction, equipment and the scope of
delivery. Special equipment is also listed that is not included in the standard
scope of delivery. The descriptions and illustrations in this brochure do not
relate to a particular version. For all details, only the respective equipment list
is valid.
1.2 Guarantee conditions
1. In addition to the legal guarantee and product warranty rights due to the
customer, Dethleffs GmbH & Co. KG may also grant a guarantee of six
years that the vehicles constructed by the company are sealed in such a
manner that moisture cannot penetrate from the outside into the interior of
the vehicle.
The guarantee obligations do not apply if the leakage is a result of improper
handling of the windows, doors and skylights or damage that has not been
properly repaired. Damage that is caused by forces of nature (e.g. flooding)
is not covered by the guarantee. The guarantee extensions include only the
correct repair work. Conversion or diminution as well as travelling
expenses or other indirect costs are not covered by the guarantee.
2. When dealing with a case of leakage covered under the conditions of this
guarantee, Dethleffs GmbH & Co. KG is obliged to rectify the defective
vehicle part concerned by repairing it free of charge or replacing the part,
depending on what is necessary to immediately to repair the damage.
Defects are to be rectified by Dethleffs GmbH & Co. KG or by an author-
ised specialist workshop in accordance with the guidelines of
Dethleffs GmbH & Co. KG.
Vehicle data
Model:
Car manufacturer/type of engine:
Serial number:
Initial registration:
Purchased from company:
Expiry of the guarantee period:
Key number:
Chassis number:
Customer Address
Surname, Christian name:
Street, No.:
Postal code, town:
Dealer's stamp and signature
8 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Guarantee
1
3. The prerequisite for this guarantee is that the vehicle must be presented
once a year to an authorised specialist workshop for an inspection. The
presentation must take place 2 months at the latest after the anniversary of
the initial registration (or delivery).
If the inspection is not carried out according to schedule, this will nullify your
warranty. It cannot be renewed by carrying out an inspection at a later time.
As proof that the inspection has been completed, there are designated cou-
pons in the Dethleffs GmbH & Co. KG guarantee booklet where inspection
stamps are to be glued and endorsed by a stamp, the date and the signa-
ture of a respective Dethleffs dealer.
4. The guarantee begins on the day of the initial registration or delivery of the
vehicle to the customer, 1 year at the latest after delivery to the dealer, and
is valid while the vehicle is in use, for 6 years at the longest. If initial regis-
tration of the vehicle precedes taking delivery, the warranty commences on
the vehicle's initial registration date (warranty qualifying date). A change of
ownership of the purchased object has no effect on the guarantee obliga-
tions. The guarantee expires if the terms outlined in paragraph 3 are not
complied with. The performance of guarantee work does not increase the
guarantee period.
5. Parts installed to rectify faults are also guaranteed under the terms of the
guarantee until the guarantee period expires.
6. If leakage occurs, the owner must notify Dethleffs GmbH & Co. KG or a
Dethleffs dealer of this in writing within 15 days of its detection. The guar-
antee certificate and the corresponding guarantee stamps must be
included with the notification. If notification of leakage does not occur within
the time limit stated, no claims can be made under the terms of the guar-
antee.
Remedying of leakage will take place after approval has been given by
Dethleffs GmbH & Co. KG.
If no agreement is reached about the type, extent and result of the repairs,
Dethleffs GmbH & Co. KG or the Dethleffs dealer will consult a neutral
expert whose decision is binding for all parties involved.
7. The costs of the inspection are to be paid by the party covered by the guar-
antee.
8. As far as legally permissible, the court responsible for Isny will be agreed
upon as the venue for jurisdiction.
9Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Guarantee
1
1.3 Inspection records
Should it be determined during an inspection that additional work is necessary,
then the carrying out of this work is dependent on the customer commissioning
this to be done. Please also adhere to the service intervals stipulated by the
manufacturers of the individual equipment. Information is included in the
service documents enclosed.
Delivery
Date:
Signature and stamp of the Dethleffs
dealer:
1st year Water ingress test
Date:
Signature and stamp of the Dethleffs
dealer:
Paste inspection
stamp here.
Water ingress test 1st year
Water ingress test 1st year
No defects found
Found defects:
10 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Guarantee
1
Should it be determined during an inspection that additional work is necessary,
then the carrying out of this work is dependent on the customer commissioning
this to be done. Please also adhere to the service intervals stipulated by the
manufacturers of the individual equipment. Information is included in the
service documents enclosed.
2nd year Water ingress test
Date:
Signature and stamp of the Dethleffs
dealer:
Paste inspection
stamp here.
Water ingress test 2nd year
Water ingress test 2nd year
No defects found
Found defects:
3rd year Water ingress test
Date:
Signature and stamp of the Dethleffs
dealer:
Paste inspection
stamp here.
Water ingress test 3rd year
Water ingress test 3rd year
No defects found
Found defects:
11Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Guarantee
1
Should it be determined during an inspection that additional work is necessary,
then the carrying out of this work is dependent on the customer commissioning
this to be done. Please also adhere to the service intervals stipulated by the
manufacturers of the individual equipment. Information is included in the
service documents enclosed.
4th year Water ingress test
Date:
Signature and stamp of the Dethleffs
dealer:
Paste inspection
stamp here.
Water ingress test 4th year
Water ingress test 4th year
No defects found
Found defects:
5th year Water ingress test
Date:
Signature and stamp of the Dethleffs
dealer:
Paste inspection
stamp here.
Water ingress test 5th year
Water ingress test 5th year
No defects found
Found defects:
12 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Guarantee
1
1.4 Inspection plan for annual inspection
We reserve the right to modify the inspection plan.
1.5 Inspection plan for water ingress test
Pos. Component Activity Interval
1 Auxiliary support Lubrication Annually
2 Joints, hinges Lubrication Annually
3 Refrigerator, heater, boiler,
cooker, lighting, storage flap
and door closures, toilet, seat
belts
Function check Annually
4 Windows, skylights Function check, water
ingress test
Annually
5 Upholstery, curtains, blinds Visual check Annually
6 Sealing strips, edges, rubber Check for damage Annually
7 Water supply Water ingress test Annually
8 Hot-air system Function check, clean
fan wheel as necessary
Annually
9 Underbody protection, floor
skirt attachment
Visual check Annually
10 Electrical system Function check Annually
11 Gas system Official gas inspection Every
two years
12 Connections between the
chassis and body
Check Every
two years
13 Underbody Visual check, repair un-
derbody protection as
necessary
Every
two years
Pos. Component Activity
1.1 Wheel housing Visual check
1.2 Rear wall floor plateau connection Visual check
1.2.1 Side wall in the direction of travel left connection Visual check
1.2.2 Side wall in the direction of travel right connec-
tion
Visual check
1.3 Front wall floor plateau connection Visual check
1.3.1 Side wall in the direction of travel left connection Visual check
1.3.2 Side wall in the direction of travel right connec-
tion
Visual check
1.4 Side wall floor plateau right connection Visual check
1.5 Side wall floor plateau left connection Visual check
1.6 Connection to driver's cabin Visual check
1.7 Base frame with base frame cut-outs Visual check
1.8 Check the status of the outer metal sheets Visual check
13Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Guarantee
1
We reserve the right to modify the inspection plan.
1.9 Check the status of the window rubbers, expan-
sion joints, sealing joints
Visual check
2.1 Measure the floor plateau at this connection
point with a moisture measuring device, write
down the corresponding values with the date of
the assessment. Prescribed maximum values –
up to 20 % normal.
If the values are above 20 % check if it is due to
accumulated condensation.
Measuring
2.2 Measure inside the vehicle (walls, window sec-
tions, roof, etc.), note changes in the colour of
the decor. Prescribed maximum values – up to
20 % normal.
If the values are above 20 % check if it is due to
accumulated condensation.
Measuring
3.1 Wheel housing Spray with Dethleffs
special weatherproof
solution
3.2 Rear wall floor plateau connection Spray with Dethleffs
special weatherproof
solution
3.3 Front wall floor plateau connection Spray with Dethleffs
special weatherproof
solution
3.4 Side wall floor plateau right connection Spray with Dethleffs
special weatherproof
solution
3.5 Side wall floor plateau left connection Spray with Dethleffs
special weatherproof
solution
Pos. Component Activity
14 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Guarantee
1
15Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Introduction
2
2Introduction
Please read this instruction manual completely before
using the vehicle for the first time!
Always keep this instruction manual in the vehicle. Also inform all other users
of the safety regulations.
With your Dethleffs motorhome you will receive a file with the following vehicle
manuals and documents:
Dethleffs documents
Instruction manual and service book (housing body)
List of Dethleffs dealers
Additional documents
Operating and installation instructions of various appliances
Complete set of documents from the chassis manufacturer
Test certificate for the gas system in accordance with German regulations
This instruction manual contains sections which describe model-spe-
cific equipment or special equipment. These sections are not specially
marked. It may be that your vehicle has not been fitted with this special
equipment. In some cases, the actual equipment of your vehicle may
therefore be different from that shown in some illustrations and descrip-
tions.
However, your vehicle may be fitted with other special equipment not
described in this instruction manual.
Special equipment is described when an explanation is required.
Adhere to the instruction manuals which are separately enclosed.
Should the vehicle be subjected to damage due to a failure to follow the
instructions in this instruction manual, then the guarantee claim is deemed
invalid.
Our vehicles are subjected to continuous development. Please understand
that we reserve the right to alter the form, equipment and technology. There-
fore, no claims can be made against the manufacturer as a result of the con-
tents of this instruction manual. The equipment which was known and included
at the time of going to press is described.
The non-observance of this symbol can lead to personal injury.
The non-observance of this symbol can lead to damage being caused to,
or inside the vehicle.
This symbol indicates recommendations or special aspects.
This symbol indicates actions which lead to environmental awareness.
The details "right", "left", "front" and "rear" always refer to the vehicle in
direction of travel.
All dimensions and weight details are "approximate".
The metric specifications are binding for physical dimensions.
16 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Introduction
2
The reprinting, translation and copying, including extracts is not permitted
without prior written authorisation from the manufacturer.
2.1 General
The vehicle is constructed in accordance with the latest technology and the
recognised safety regulations. Nevertheless, personal injury may result and
the vehicle may be damaged if the safety instructions in this instruction manual
are not followed.
Only use the vehicle in a technically impeccable condition. Follow the instruc-
tions in the instruction manual.
Malfunctions which impair the safety of persons or the vehicle should be
immediately remedied by qualified personnel. To avoid further damages,
observe the duty to avert, minimize or mitigate loss for the user during faults.
Have the vehicle's braking and gas systems inspected and repaired by an
authorised specialist workshop only.
Alterations to the body are only to be carried out with the authorisation of the
manufacturer.
The vehicle is designed for the exclusive transport of persons. Luggage and
accessories may only be transported up to the maximum permissible gross
weight.
Observe the test and inspection periods stipulated by the manufacturer.
2.2 Environmental tips
Be considerate of the environment.
Remember that: All kinds of waste water and household waste are not to
be disposed of in drains or in the open countryside.
On board, collect waste water only in the waste water tank or – if
necessary – in other containers designed for that purpose.
Only empty the waste water tank and toilet cassette or sewage tank at dis-
posal stations at the camping or caravan sites, which are especially pro-
vided for this purpose. When stopping in towns and communities, observe
the instructions at caravan sites or ask where there are disposal stations.
Empty waste water tank as often as possible, even when it is not com-
pletely full (hygiene).
If possible, flush out waste water tank and, if necessary, drainage pipe with
fresh water every time it is emptied.
Never allow the toilet cassette or sewage tank to become too full. Empty
the toilet cassette or sewage tank frequently, at the latest as soon as the
level indicator lights up.
Separate household waste according to glass, tin cans, plastic and wet
waste also when on a journey. Enquire at the town or community authority
about disposal points. Household waste is not to be disposed of in waste
paper baskets which are situated at car parks.
Empty waste bins as often as possible into the containers provided for this
purpose. This helps to avoid unpleasant smells and an accumulation of
rubbish on board.
17Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Introduction
2
When parked, do not allow the engine to run more than necessary. When
running idle, a cold engine releases more contaminants than usual. The
running temperature of the engine is achieved more quickly whilst the
vehicle is in motion.
Use an environmentally-friendly WC chemical agent for the WC which can
also be biologically degraded and only use small doses.
When staying in towns and communities for long periods, search for
parking areas which are specially reserved for motorhomes. Enquire at the
town or community authority about parking spaces.
Always leave the parking places in a clean condition.
18 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Introduction
2
19Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Safety
3
3Safety
Chapter overview
This chapter contains important safety instructions. The safety instructions are
for the protection of persons and property.
The instructions address the following topics:
fire prevention and what to do in case of fire
general care of the vehicle
road safety of the vehicle
towing
gas system of the vehicle
electrical system of the vehicle
water system of the vehicle
3.1 Fire prevention
3.1.1 Avoidance of fire risks
3.1.2 Fire-fighting
3.1.3 In case of fire
All windows and doors which meet the following requirements are considered
as emergency exits:
Never leave children in the vehicle unattended.
Keep flammable materials clear of heating and cooking appliances.
Lights can get very hot. When the light is switched on, there must always
be a safety distance of 30 cm between light and flammable objects. Fire
hazard!
Never use portable heating or cooking appliances.
Only authorised qualified personnel may make changes to the electrical
system, gas system or appliances.
Always carry a dry powder fire extinguisher in the vehicle. The fire extin-
guisher must be approved, tested and close at hand.
The fire extinguisher is not included in the scope of delivery.
Have the fire extinguisher tested at regular intervals by authorised qual-
ified personnel. Observe the date of testing.
Always keep a fire blanket near the cooker.
Evacuate all passengers.
Cut off the electrical power supply and disconnect from the mains.
Close regulator tap on the gas bottle.
Sound the alarm and call the fire brigade.
Fight the fire if this is possible without risk.
Acquaint yourself with the position and operation of the emergency exits.
Keep escape routes clear.
Observe the fire extinguisher instructions for use.
20 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Safety
3
Open to the outside or can be shifted in horizontal direction
Opening angle at least 70°
Minimum diameter of clearance = 450 mm
Maximum distance from the vehicle floor = 950 mm
3.2 General
3.3 Road safety
The oxygen in the vehicle interior is used up by breathing and the use of
gas operated appliances. That is why the oxygen needs to be replaced
on a constant basis. For this purpose, forced ventilation options (e.g.
skylights with forced ventilation, mushroom-shaped vents or floor vents)
are fitted to the vehicle. Never cover or block forced ventilations from the
inside or outside with objects such as e.g. a winter mat. Keep forced ven-
tilations clear of snow and leaves. There is a danger of suffocation due
to increased CO
2
levels.
Observe the headroom of the doors.
As far as the fitted appliances (heater, cooker, refrigerator, etc.) and the
base vehicle (engine, brakes, etc.) are concerned, the instruction manuals
are authoritative. It is imperative that they be observed.
Fitting accessories or special equipment can alter the dimensions, weight
and road behaviour of the vehicle. Some of the parts must be entered in
the vehicle papers.
Only use wheel rims and tyres which are approved for the vehicle. Informa-
tion concerning the size of the approved wheel rims and tyres is included
in the vehicle documents or can be obtained from authorised dealers and
service centres.
Firmly apply the handbrake when parking the vehicle.
If the maximum permissible gross weight of the vehicle exceeds 4 tonnes,
wheel chocks must be used when parking on gradients. The wheel chocks
are provided as standard for vehicles with a maximum permissible gross
weight exceeding 4 tonnes.
When leaving the vehicle, it is imperative that all doors, external flaps and
windows are closed.
Carry a hazard warning triangle and a first-aid kit and/or flashing hazard
warning light when this is required by law.
The vehicle may only be driven by drivers who hold a driving licence which
is valid for the respective vehicle class.
When selling the vehicle, hand over all instruction manuals for the vehicle
and the fitted appliances.
Before commencing the journey, carry out a functional check of indi-
cating and lighting equipment, the steering and the brakes.
If the vehicle has been stationary for a long period (approx. 10 months)
have the braking and gas systems checked by an authorised specialist
workshop.
Before commencing the journey and after short interruptions of the
journey, ensure that the entrance step is completely retracted.
21Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Safety
3
Before commencing the journey, open, lock and secure the shades sit-
uated on the windscreen and on the driver's and front passenger's win-
dows.
Before commencing the journey, remove the television from the support
and store it securely.
Before commencing the journey, place and secure the flat screen and
screen support in the initial position. If the screen holder is installed in a
TV cabinet: Close TV cabinet.
Before commencing the journey, take off the loose sink and drain basin
covers and store them securely in the kitchen unit or the wardrobe.
Before commencing the journey, rotate all swivel seats in the direction
of travel and lock in position. During the journey, the swivel seats must
remain locked in place in the direction of travel.
During the journey, persons are only to sit on the permitted seats (see
chapter 5). The authorised number of seats is stipulated in the vehicle
documents.
Seat belts must be worn by all passengers.
Fasten your seat belts before the beginning of the journey and keep
them fastened during the journey.
It is not permitted to stay in the alcove during the journey.
Always secure children with the children safety equipment prescribed for
the respective height and weight.
Factory-set three-point safety belts must be used when attaching child
restraint systems.
The base vehicle is a commercial vehicle (small truck). Adjust your
driving technique accordingly.
In case of underpasses, tunnels or similar obstacles, note the total
height of the vehicle (including the roof load).
In winter, the roof must be free of snow and ice before commencing the
journey.
Check tyre pressure before a journey or every 2 weeks. Wrong tyre
pressure causes excessive wear and can lead to damage or even to tyre
burst. You can lose control of the vehicle.
Do not operate the independent vehicle heater at petrol stations. Danger
of explosion!
Do not operate the independent vehicle heater in closed spaces. Danger
of suffocation!
Before commencing the journey, distribute the payload evenly within the
vehicle (see chapter 4).
When loading the vehicle and when taking a rest from driving, in order to
load luggage or food, for example, observe the maximum permissible
gross weight and axle loads (refer to vehicle documents).
Before commencing the journey, ensure that all cupboard doors, the toilet
compartment door and all drawers and flaps are secure. Engage the refrig-
erator door securing device.
Before commencing the journey, close windows and skylights.
Before commencing the journey, close all external flaps and lock them.
22 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Safety
3
3.4 Towing
3.5 Gas system
3.5.1 General instructions
Before commencing the journey, remove the external supports and retract
the corner steadies or steady legs, which are fitted to the vehicle.
Before commencing the journey, put the antenna in park position.
During the initial journey and each time after changing a wheel, re-tighten
the wheel bolts/wheel nuts after 50 km (30 miles). Subsequently inspect
them at regular intervals in order to ensure that they are firmly seated.
Tyres may not be older than 6 years as the material becomes brittle over
time (see chapter 14).
When using snow chains, the tyres, wheel suspension and steering are
subjected to an additional load. When using snow chains, drive slowly
(maximum speed 50 km/h) and only on streets which are completely cov-
ered with snow. Otherwise the vehicle could be damaged.
Care is to be taken when connecting and detaching a trailer. Risk of acci-
dent and injury!
No persons are to be between the towing vehicle and the trailer during
positioning for connecting and detaching.
Before commencing the journey, when leaving the vehicle or when gas
equipment is not in use, close all gas isolator taps and the main isolator
tap on the gas bottle.
No appliance operated by a naked flame (e.g. heater or refrigerator) may
be in operation when filling the tank, on ferries or in the garage. Danger
of explosion!
Do not use appliances operated with a naked flame in closed spaces
(e.g. garages). Danger of poisoning and suffocation!
Only have the gas system maintained, repaired or altered by an author-
ised specialist workshop.
Have the gas system checked by an authorised specialist workshop
according to the national regulations before commissioning. This also
applies for not registered vehicles. For modifications to the gas system
have the gas system immediately checked by an authorised specialist
workshop.
The gas pressure regulator and exhaust gas pipes must also be
inspected. The gas pressure regulator has to be replaced after 10 years
at the latest. The vehicle owner is responsible for seeing that this is car-
ried out.
In case of a defect of the gas system (gas odour, high gas consumption)
there is danger of explosion! Close regulator tap on the gas bottle imme-
diately. Open doors and windows and ventilate well.
If the gas system is defective: Do not smoke; do not ignite any open
flames, and do not operate electric switches (light switches etc.).
Before using the cooker make sure that there is sufficient ventilation.
Open windows or the skylight.
Do not use the gas cooker or gas oven for heating purposes.
23Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Safety
3
3.5.2 Gas bottles
If there are several gas devices, each gas device must have its own gas
isolator tap. If individual gas devices are not in use, close the respective
gas isolator tap.
Ignition safety valves must close within 1 minute after the gas flame has
extinguished. A clicking sound is audible. Check function from time to
time.
The built-in gas devices are exclusively meant for use with propane or
butane gas or a mixture of both. The gas pressure regulator as well as
all built-in gas devices are designed for a gas pressure of 30 mbar.
Propane gas is capable of gasification up to -42 °C, whereas butane gas
gasifies at 0 °C. Below these temperatures no gas pressure is available.
Butane gas is unsuitable for use in winter.
Regularly inspect the gas tube fitted to the gas bottle connection for
tightness. The gas tube must not have any tears and must not be
porous. Have the gas tube replaced by an authorised specialist work-
shop no later than ten years after the manufacturing date. The operator
of the gas system must see to it that the parts are replaced.
Due to its function and construction, the gas bottle compartment is a
space which is open to the exterior. Never cover or block up the standard
forced ventilations. Otherwise gas that is emitted can not be diverted to
the outside.
Do not use the gas bottle compartment as storage space as it is not
moisture-proof.
Secure the gas bottle compartment against unauthorised access. To do
this, lock the compartment.
The regulator tap on the gas bottle must be accessible.
Only connect gas-operated devices (e.g. gas grill) which have been
designed for a gas pressure of 30 mbar.
The exhaust gas pipe must be fitted tightly to the heating system and to
the vent and must be sealed. The exhaust gas pipe must not show any
evidence of damage.
Exhaust fumes must be able to escape into the atmosphere unhindered
and fresh air must be able to enter unhindered. For this reason, keep the
exhaust pipe and intake openings clean and unobstructed (e.g. free from
snow and ice). For this reason, no snow walls or aprons may lie against
the vehicle.
Gas bottles are only to be transported within the designated gas bottle
compartment.
Place the gas bottles in vertical position in the gas bottle compartment.
Fasten the gas bottles so that they are unable to turn or tilt.
If the gas bottles are not connected to the gas tube, always place the
protective cap on top.
Close the regulator tap on the gas bottle before the gas pressure regu-
lator or gas tube are removed from the gas bottle.
The gas pressure regulator or the gas tube must only be secured with a
suitable gas spanner (Do not overtighten).
24 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Safety
3
3.6 Electrical system
3.7 Water system
Only use special gas pressure regulators with a safety valve designed
for vehicle use. Other gas pressure regulators are not permitted and
cannot meet the demanding requirements.
Use the gas pressure regulator defroster if the temperature falls below
5°C.
Use only 11 kg or 5 kg gas bottles. Camping gas bottles with built-in
check valve (blue bottle with max. 2.5 or 3 kg content) are can be used
in exceptional cases with a safety valve.
Use the shortest possible tube lengths (150 cm max.) for external gas
bottles.
Never block the floor ventilation openings below the gas bottles.
Only allow qualified personnel to work on the electrical system.
Prior to carrying out work on the electrical system, switch off all devices
and lights, disconnect the battery and disconnect the vehicle from the
mains.
Only use original fuses with the stipulated values.
Only replace defective fuses when the cause of the defect is known and
has been remedied.
Never bridge or repair fuses.
Water left standing in the water tank or in the water pipes becomes
undrinkable after a short period. Therefore, before each use of the
vehicle, thoroughly clean the water pipes and the water tank. After each
use of the vehicle completely empty the water tank and the water pipes.
In the case of lay-ups lasting more than a week disinfect the water
system before using the vehicle.
If the vehicle is not used for several days or if it is not heated when there is
a risk of frost, empty the entire water system. Leave the water taps on in
central position. Leave the safety/drainage valve (if there is one) and all
drain cocks open. Frost damage to appliances, frost damage to the vehicle
and deposits in water-carrying components can be avoided in this way.
25Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Before the journey
4
4Before t he journey
Chapter overview
This chapter contains important information which has to be noted before com-
mencing your journey or carrying out any tasks before the journey.
The instructions address the following topics:
keys
registration
calculating the payload
correct loading of the vehicle
towing
retracting and extending the entrance step
PVC-floor covering
storing the television
storing the sink cover
securing the Roman shade for the driver's and passenger's windows
securing the drawers in the kitchen unit
using snow chains
At the end of the chapter there is a checklist which once again summarises the
most important points.
4.1 Keys
Your vehicle comes complete with all the keys required for the vehicle. These
are e.g.:
Two keys for
ignition lock
driver's and passenger's doors
fuel tank
Two keys for
conversion door of the body
drinking water filler neck
external flaps
Always deposit a replacement key outside the vehicle. Make a note of the key
number. Our authorised dealers and workshops can offer assistance in case
of loss.
4.2 Registration
Your motorhome is a vehicle which must be registered. Observe national reg-
ulations on registration.
Please remember that certain countries require a separate national code
sticker in addition to the EU plate.
26 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Before the journey
4
4.3 Payload
On loading, make sure that the payload's centre of gravity is as low as possible
(directly above the floor of the vehicle). Otherwise this may affect the driving
characteristics of the vehicle.
4.3.1 Terms
Maximum permissible
gross weight in a laden
condition
The maximum permissible gross weight in a laden condition is the weight that
a vehicle may never exceed.
The maximum permissible overall weight in laden condition consists of the
mass in ready-to-drive condition and of the payload.
In the vehicle documents, the manufacturer has specified the maximum per-
missible gross weight in a laden condition.
Permitted mass The permitted mass is the weight specified by the manufacturer for issuing the
type approval. The permitted mass must never exceed the maximum permis-
sible gross weight of the loaded vehicle.
Overloading the vehicle and wrong tyre pressure can cause tyres to
burst. You can lose control of the vehicle.
Only the maximum permissible gross weight and the mass in a ready-to-
drive condition, not the actual weight of the vehicle, is stated in the
vehicle documents. For your own safety, we recommend that you have
your loaded vehicle (with all passengers, luggage and personal objects)
weighed on a public weighbridge before you set out on your journey.
Adapt the speed to the payload. The stopping distance is increased if the
payload is high.
Do not exceed the maximum permissible gross weight stated in the vehicle
documents by the payload.
Built-in accessories and special equipment reduce the payload.
Adhere to the axle load stated in the vehicle documents.
Description Load (kg)
Maximum permitted
payloads
Roof racks 100
Bike rack Triple 50
Quadruple 60
Sliding drawer 40
Rear garage 200
Overcab bed 200
Pull-down bed 200
Rear bed 200
Technically speaking, the term "mass" has now replaced the term "weight".
However, "weight" is still the term more frequent in common use. For better
understanding, "mass" is therefore only used in the following sections for
fixed formulations.
All specifications according to EU norm DIN EN 1646-2.
27Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Before the journey
4
Mass in ready-to-drive
condition
The mass in ready-to-drive condition is the weight of the ready-to-drive
standard vehicle.
The mass in ready-to-drive condition is made up as follows:
Unladen weight (mass of the empty vehicle) with factory-installed standard
equipment
Driver's weight
Basic equipment weight
Unladen weight includes lubricants such as oils and coolants which have been
filled, the on-board tool set, the spare wheel and a fuel tank which has been
filled up to 90 %.
75 kg are calculated for the weight of the driver, regardless of how much the
driver really weighs.
Basic equipment includes all equipment and fluids required for safe and proper
vehicle use. The weight of the basic equipment includes:
Water system filled up to 90 % (water tank and pipes)
Gas bottles filled up to 90 %
A full heating system
A full toilet flushing system
The power cables for the 240 V power supply
The installation kit for an auxiliary battery if an auxiliary battery can be used
The waste water and sewage tanks are empty.
In the vehicle documents, the manufacturer specifies the mass in ready-to-
drive conditions.
Payload The payload is made up as follows:
Conventional load
Additional equipment
Personal equipment
You will find explanations on the individual components of the payload in the
following text.
Conventional load The conventional load is the weight specified by the manufacturer for the pas-
sengers.
Conventional load means: 75 kg are calculated for every seat specified by the
manufacturer, regardless of how much the passengers actually weigh. The
driver's seat is already included as part of the mass in ready-to-drive condition
and must not be calculated as part of the conventional load.
In the vehicle documents, the manufacturer specifies the number of seats.
Example for calculating
the basic equipment
Water tank with 120 l 120 kg
Gas bottles (2 x 11 kg
gas
+ 2 x 14 kg
bottle
) + 50 kg
Boiler with 12 l + 12 kg
240 V power cable + 4 kg
Installation kit for auxiliary battery + 20 kg
Total = 206 kg
The vehicle's payload can be increased by reducing the weight in a ready-
to-drive condition. To do this, it is allowed for example to empty the fluid
containers or to remove the gas bottles.
28 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Before the journey
4
Additional equipment Additional equipment includes accessories and special equipment. Examples
of additional equipment include:
Caravan coupling
Awning
Bike or motorcycle rack
Satellite unit
Chapter 16 lists the weights of the various items of special equipment; they
may also be obtained from the manufacturer.
Personal equipment Personal equipment includes all items in the vehicle that are not included in
the conventional load or in the additional equipment. For example, personal
equipment can include the following:
Foodstuffs
Crockery
Television
Radio
Clothes
Bedding
Toys
Books
Toiletries
No matter where kept, personal equipment also includes:
Animals
Bikes
Boats
Surfboards
Sports equipment
For the personal equipment, according to the applicable regulations, the man-
ufacturer must use a minimum weight that is determined according to the fol-
lowing formula:
Formula Minimum weight M (kg) = 10 x N + 10 x L
Explanation N = maximum number of people including the driver, as stated by the manu-
facturer
L = total length of the vehicle in metres
4.3.2 Calculating the payload
The payload (see section 4.3.1) is the difference in weight between
Maximum permissible gross weight in a laden condition and
Vehicle mass complete in a ready-to-drive condition.
The payload calculation at the factory is partly based on all-inclusive
weights. For safety reasons, the maximum permissible gross weight in
a laden condition must not be exceeded.
Only the maximum permissible gross weight and the mass in a ready-to-
drive condition, not the actual weight of the vehicle, is stated in the
vehicle documents. For your own safety, we recommend that you have
your loaded vehicle (with all passengers, luggage and personal objects)
weighed on a public weighbridge before you set out on your journey.
29Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Before the journey
4
The calculation of the payload from the difference between the maximum per-
missible gross weight in laden condition and the mass specified by the manu-
facturer in ready-to-drive condition is however only a theoretical value.
Only if the vehicle is weighed with full tanks (fuel and water), full gas bottles
and complete additional equipment on a public weighbridge, can the actual
payload be determined.
To do this, proceed as follows:
First only drive the vehicle on to the weighbridge with the front wheels and
have it weighed.
Then drive the vehicle on to the weighbridge with the back wheels and have
it weighed.
The individual values give the current axle loads. These are important for the
correct loading of the vehicle (see section 4.3.3). The sum of these values is
the current weight of the vehicle.
The actual payload is the difference between the maximum permissible gross
weight in laden condition and the weighed vehicle weight.
This can be used to determine the weight that remains for the personal equip-
ment:
Determine the weight of the passengers and subtract it from the value for
the actual payload.
The result is the weight that is permitted for the actual load of the personal
equipment.
4.3.3 Loading the vehicle correctly
Mass in kg to be
calculated
Calculation
Example for calculating
the payload
Maximum permissible gross weight ac-
cording to vehicle documents
3500
Vehicle mass in a ready-to-drive condi-
tion, including basic equipment according
to vehicle documents
- 3070
This results in a permissible payload
of
430
Conventional load e.g.: 3 persons each
weighing 75 kg
- 225
Additional equipment - 40
For the personal equipment this re-
sults in
= 165
For safety reasons, never exceed the maximum permissible gross
weight in a laden condition.
Distribute the load evenly on the left and right sides of the vehicle.
Distribute the load evenly on both axles. In doing so, observe the axle
loads specified in the vehicle documents. Observe the permissible load-
carrying capacity of the tyres (see chapter 14).
30 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Before the journey
4
Large storage spaces, such as the rear garage, also have room for heavy
objects (e.g. motorcycle). This might mean that the axle load on the rear axle
is exceeded.
However, the individual axles may not be overloaded under any circum-
stances. That is why it is important, at which distance to the axles the load is
stored.
To distribute the load correctly, you will need a scale, a tape measure, a cal-
culator and some time.
Two simple formulas are needed to calculate the effect of the weight of the
load on the axles:
Formulas A x G : R = weight on the rear axle
Weight on the rear axle – G = weight on the front axle
Explanation A = distance between storage compartment and front axle in cm
G = weight of the load in the storage compartment in kg
R = wheelbase of the vehicle (distance between axles) in cm
Calculating axle loads:
Multiply the distance between storage compartment and front axle (A) with
the weight of the load in the storage compartment (G) and divide the result
by the wheelbase (R). The result is the weight of the load in the storage
compartment on the rear axle. Make a note of this weight and of the storage
compartment.
In a second step, subtract the weight in the storage compartment (G) from
the weight calculated beforehand. If the result is a positive value
(example 1), this means that the load on the front axle is reduced by this
value. If the result is a negative value (example 2), this means that the load
on the front axle is increased. Make a note of this value, too.
Calculate all storage compartments of the vehicle in the same way.
In a last step, add all weights calculated for the rear axle to the rear axle
load and add (or subtract) all weights calculated for the front axle to (from)
the front axle load.
How to determine rear axle load and front axle load is described in
section 4.3.2.
If the calculated value exceeds the permissible axle load, the load must be dis-
tributed in a different way.
Heavy loads behind the rear axle can reduce the load on the front axle
due to the leverage effect ( ). This applies especially to long rear
extensions, if a motorbike is transported on the rear carrier or if there is
a heavy load in the rear storage space. The release of the front axle neg-
atively affects the driving quality, especially for front-driven vehicles.
Store all objects in such a way that they cannot slip.
Store heavy objects (awning, tin cans, etc.) close to the axles. Low-lying
storage compartments whose doors do not open in the direction of travel
are particularly suited for storing heavy objects.
Stack light objects (laundry) in the roof storage cabinets.
Load the bike rack with bicycles only (max. four units).
Measure the external distances horizontally from the centre of the front
wheel to the centre of the storage compartment or to the centre of the back
wheel.
31Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Before the journey
4
If the load on the front axle is too low, the grip of the tyres on the road is
reduced (traction). This applies in particular to vehicles with front wheel drive.
In this case, the load must be redistributed, too.
4.3.4 Roof load
Example 1 Example 2
Example calculation
Distance to the front axle A (A1) 450 (cm) (A2) 250 (cm)
Weight in the storage compartment G x 100 (kg) x 50 (kg)
Wheelbase of the vehicle R ÷ 325 (cm) ÷ 325 (cm)
Load on the rear axle
(add to the axle load)
138.5 (kg) 38.5 (kg)
Weight in the storage compartment - 100 (kg) - 50 (kg)
Load relief to the front axle
(subtract from the axle load)
38.5 (kg)
Load on the front axle
(add to the axle load)
-11.5 (kg)
Access the roof only when a roof rail has been fitted. Always use the
ladder at the rear to climb onto the roof.
Take care when stepping onto the ladder. There is danger of slipping
when the ladder is moist or icy.
Take care when stepping onto the roof. There is danger of slipping when
the roof is moist or icy.
Do not overload the roof. Road behaviour and brake reaction deteriorate
as the roof load increases.
If the vehicle is equipped with a roof rail, load racks can be mounted on the
roof rail for roof loads (e.g. for surfboards, rubber boats or light canoes).
Special girder systems are available as accessory. The authorised dealer
or service centre will be happy to advise you.
The maximum permissible roof load is 100 kg.
The vehicle roof is not suitable for localised load. Before stepping on to the
roof, extensively cover the area you will be treading on. Materials with a
smooth or soft surface are suitable, for example, a thick polystyrene panel.
Secure roof loads with tension belts. Do not use rubber expanders.
Observe the overall height of the vehicle when the roof rack is loaded.
The driver's cabin should have a clearly visible notice stating the overall
height. This eliminates the need for calculations at bridges and thorough-
fares.
32 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Before the journey
4
Rear ladder
Folding downwards:
Insert the key into the locking cylinder (Fig. 1,2) of the rear ladder lock
(Fig. 1,1) and turn it a quarter turn until the key is in a vertical position.
Hold the foldable part of the rear ladder (Fig. 1,4) and swing out the
securing bracket (Fig. 1,5).
Pull out the key and fold the rear ladder downwards.
Folding upwards:
Fold the rear ladder upwards and hold it firmly.
Insert the key into the locking cylinder (Fig. 1,2) of the rear ladder lock
(Fig. 1,1).
Swivel the securing bracket (Fig. 1,5) inward around the tube of the fixed
part of the rear ladder (Fig. 1,3).
Turn the key a quarter turn until it is in a horizontal position.
Check the rear ladder lock: Slightly pull on the rear ladder.
4.3.5 Rear garage
Fig. 1 Rear ladder lock
Observe the permissible axle loads and maximum permissible gross
weight when loading the rear garage.
The maximum permissible load of the rear garage is 200 kg. Do not
exceed the permissible rear axle load.
Observe: If the rear garage or (depending on the model) the rear storage
space is loaded to its maximum capacity, this will reduce the load on
the front axle due to the levering action. The driving quality is impaired.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, clamping rails with clamping eyelets
are mounted in the rear garage or in the rear storage space. Always secure
loads onto the clamping eyelets. Always use tightening straps or lashing
nets for securing the load, never rubber expanders.
When clamping loads, always check that the clamping eyelets are placed
tightly in the clamping rails. If the clamping eyelet is not anchored tightly in
the clamping rail, the load may slide or loosen during forcible movements
of the steering wheel or when braking.
Distribute the load evenly. Excessive spot loads can lead to damages of
the floor covering.
33Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Before the journey
4
Moving the clamping
eyelets:
Turn the clamping eyelet (Fig. 2,1) half a turn in an anticlockwise direction.
Push the clamping eyelet into the clamping rail (Fig. 2,2) to the desired
position.
Give clamping eyelet one half turn in a clockwise direction. The clamping
eyelet sits tightly in the clamping rail again.
Check that the clamping eyelet is tight.
4.3.6 Double floor
4.3.7 Sliding drawer
4.3.8 Bike rack
Fig. 2 Clamping eyelets rear garage
1 Clamping eyelet
2 Clamping rail
Observe the permissible axle loads and maximum permissible gross
weight when loading the double floor.
Distribute the load evenly. Excessive spot loads can lead to damages of
the floor covering.
Do not place loads weighing more than 40 kg into the sliding drawer.
Observe the permissible axle loads and maximum permissible gross
weight when loading the bike rack.
Bicycles may not jut out beyond the maximum width of the vehicle.
Adjust the attachments for the bikes accordingly.
Load the bike rack with bicycles only (max. four units).
Check the secure attachment of the bicycles on the bike rack after the
first 10 km and then at each break in the journey.
34 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Before the journey
4
Loading the bike rack with
bicycles
When loading the bike rack, observe the centre of gravity. The centre of gravity
of the bicycles must be as close as possible to the rear wall of the vehicle. The
bike rack should always be loaded from the inside to the outside.
Loading the bike rack correctly:
Depending on the model, fold the bike rack down or pull it out.
Place the heaviest bicycle directly against the rear wall.
Place the lightest bicycles in the centre or on the outside of the bike rack.
Secure the front and rear wheels of each bicycle with the retaining straps
on the bike rack.
In addition, fasten the outermost bicycle depending on the model of the
bike rack on the retaining clip or the retaining bracket and to the spacer
respectively.
If the bike rack is only loaded with one bicycle, position the bicycle as closely
as possible to the rear wall.
4.4 Towing
4.5 Entrance step
The identification plate and rear lights must not be covered.
Driving with a folded out bike rack without bicycles is not permitted.
Before every journey, check:
Is the bike rack without bicycles folded in correctly?
Are the bicycles securely fastened to the bike rack using the bike rack
belts?
Care is to be taken when connecting and detaching a trailer. Risk of acci-
dent and injury!
No persons are to be between the towing vehicle and the trailer during
positioning for connecting and detaching.
Observe the permissible nose weight and rear axle load of the towing
vehicle. Nose weight and rear axle load must not be exceeded. The
values of the nose weight and rear axle load are included in the docu-
ments of the vehicle and the caravan coupling.
Trailer with an overrun brake: Do not connect or detach trailer with the
overrun brake on.
Caravan coupling with detachable ball neck: If the ball neck is mounted
incorrectly, there is the danger of the trailer breaking away. Observe the
instruction manual for the caravan coupling.
Before commencing the journey and after short interruptions of the
journey, ensure that the entrance step is completely retracted.
Do not stand in the direct range of the entrance step while it is being
retracted or extended.
Do not step on the entrance step until it has extended completely. There
is a risk of injury.
Do not under any circumstances raise or lower persons or loads with the
entrance step.
35Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Before the journey
4
Before stepping on the entrance step, fully extend it.
Extending:
Press lower part of the rocker switch (Fig. 3,1) or press the left switch
(Fig. 4,1) until the entrance step has extended completely.
Retracting:
Press upper part of the rocker switch (Fig. 3,1) or press the right switch
(Fig. 4,2) until the entrance step has retracted completely.
The entrance step can also be retracted and extended with the remote control.
Extending:
Press the switch (Fig. 5,1) until the entrance step has extended completely.
Retracting:
Press the switch (Fig. 5,2) until the entrance step has retracted completely.
Take note of the different step heights and make certain that the ground is
firm and even when exiting.
Do not grease or lubricate the pivot bearing and joints of the entrance step
(see chapter 12).
The switch to operate the entrance step is located on the inside of the
vehicle in the area of the conversion door.
If the entrance step has not been properly retracted and locked into place,
a warning tone is heard when the ignition is switched on.
Follow the warning notice on the entrance step.
Fig. 3 Operating switch entrance step Fig. 4 Operating switch for entrance
step (alternative)
Fig. 5 Remote control for entrance
step
36 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Before the journey
4
Emergency operation If the electric drive of the entrance step fails, follow the directions below to
manually retract the entrance step:
Pull out the securing splint from the connection to the engine.
Release the rectangular connection to the engine using a suitable object
(e.g. a screwdriver).
Push in the entrance step by hand and secure it using a suitable device
(e.g. a string).
Contact customer service.
4.6 PVC-floor covering
4.7 Television
Holder in the TV cabinet The flat screen is attached to a console in the TV cabinet.
Storing the flat screen:
Rotate the flat screen to its initial position and lock it into place.
Insert the holder for the flat screen on the handle (Fig. 6,1) until the latch
(Fig. 6,2) locks into place.
Close TV cabinet.
Shoes with pointed heels can leave permanent impressions in the PVC-
floor covering. Never wear shoes with pointed heels in the vehicle.
Rubber mats or long exposure to ketchup, carrot juice, ink, blood or lipstick
can discolour the PVC-floor covering. If possible, remove stains from the
floor immediately.
Before commencing the journey, remove the television from the support
and store it securely.
Before commencing the journey, place and secure the flat screen and
screen support in the initial position. If the screen holder is installed in a
TV cabinet: Close TV cabinet.
Before commencing the journey, ensure that the antenna is in park posi-
tion. Danger of accidents! Park position means: The antenna points
towards the back, is fully lowered and is locked in this position.
Further information on positioning the flat screen can be obtained from
chapter 7.
Fig. 6 Holder in the TV cabinet
37Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Before the journey
4
Holder with jointed arm The flat screen is fastened to a jointed arm.
Storing the flat screen:
Swivel flat screen back to its initial position and lock it into place.
4.8 Sink cover
Fig. 7 Holder with jointed arm
In the event of an accident or emergency braking, the sink cover
(Fig. 8,1) could injure the occupants of the vehicle. Before the journey,
take the sink cover off the sink and store it securely in the kitchen unit or
wardrobe.
Fig. 8 Sink cover
38 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Before the journey
4
4.9 Roman shades for driver's window and front
passenger's window
Securing: On the Roman shades for the driver's and passenger's window, push the
handle (Fig. 9,1) onto the cap. The Roman shade is secured.
4.10 Central locking system for kitchen unit
Depending on the model, the kitchen unit is fitted with a central locking system.
The flaps and drawers of the kitchen unit can be locked and unlocked manu-
ally via the switch (Fig. 10,2) behind the movable panel (Fig. 10,1).
When you start the vehicle engine, the central locking system is activated
automatically.
While travelling, the Roman shades for the windscreen, driver's window
and front passenger's window must be open, in a fixed position and
secured.
Fig. 9 Locking mechanism for Roman
shade on driver's/front pas-
senger's windows
Fig. 10 Switch for the kitchen unit's
central locking system
1 Panel
2 Switch for the kitchen unit's central
locking system
If a flap or drawer is open when the vehicle's engine is started, it will be
locked automatically following closing.
39Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Before the journey
4
4.11 Snow chains
The use of snow chains is subject to the legal regulations of the individual
countries.
Always mount snow chains to the drive wheels.
After a few metres, check the tension of the snow chains.
4.12 Road safety
Before commencing the journey, work through the checklist:
Only mount snow chains if there is a clearance of at least 50 mm between
the tyres and the vehicle body.
When using snow chains, the tyres, wheel suspension and steering are
subjected to an additional load. When using snow chains, drive slowly
(maximum speed 50 km/h) and only on streets which are completely cov-
ered with snow. Otherwise the vehicle could be damaged.
Observe the fitting instructions issued by the manufacturer of the snow
chains.
Only use snow chains approved by IVECO.
Do not fit snow chains on alloy wheel rims.
If the drive axle of the vehicle has twin tyres (2 tyres next to each other),
mount the the snow chains to the outer tyres.
The snow chains are available at your IVECO dealer.
Check tyre pressure before a journey or every 2 weeks. Wrong tyre
pressure causes excessive wear and can lead to damage or even to tyre
burst. You can lose control of the vehicle.
No. Checks Checked
Base vehicle
1 All vehicle documents are on board
2 Tyres in proper condition
3 Vehicle lighting, brake lights and reversing lights function
4 Oil levels for engine, gearbox and power steering controlled
5 Coolant and fluid for windscreen washers filled up
6 Brakes function
7 Brakes react evenly
8 When braking, the vehicle remains in the lane
Housing body, outside
9 Awning completely retracted
10 Roof free of snow and ice (in winter)
11 External connections and lines disconnected and stored away
12 External supports removed
13 Fitted steady legs retracted and fixed in place
14 Wheel chocks removed and stored away
40 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Before the journey
4
15 Entrance step retracted (observe warning tone)
16 External flaps closed and locked
17 Conversion door locked
18 Overall height of the vehicle including roof rack when loaded
measured and noted. Keep the height information close at
hand in the driver's cabin
Housing body, inside
19 Windows and skylights closed and locked
20 Television secured in the TV cabinet or removed from the sup-
port and stored securely
21 Television antenna retracted (if one is built in)
22 Loose parts stored away or fixed in position
23 Open storage spaces empty
24 Refrigerator door secured
25 All drawers and flaps closed
26 Living area doors and sliding doors secured
27 Children's seats mounted to seats with three-point safety belts
28 Shades in the driver's cabin opened and secured
Gas system
29 Gas bottles firmly fixed in the gas bottle compartment so that
they are unable to turn
30 Protective cap set on top of the gas bottle
31 Regulator tap on the gas bottle and gas isolator taps are
closed
Electrical system
32 Check the battery voltage of the starter and living area battery
(see chapter 9). If the panel indicates that the battery voltage
is too low, the respective battery will need to be recharged.
Observe the notes and instructions in chapter 9
Commence journey with fully charged starter and
living area batteries.
No. Checks Checked
41Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
During the journey
5
5During t he journey
Chapter overview
This chapter contains instructions on how to drive the motorhome.
The instructions address the following topics:
reversing camera
driving speed
brakes
seat belts
seats and headrests
seating arrangement
electrically adjustable external mirrors
sun blinds
pneumatic spring
bonnet
windscreen washer fluid container
cooling water compensator reservoir
filling the tank
5.1 Driving the motorhome
The base vehicle is a commercial vehicle (small truck). Adjust your
driving technique accordingly.
Before commencing the journey and after short interruptions of the
journey, ensure that the entrance step is completely retracted.
During the journey, seat belts should always be worn at the seats that
have seat belts mounted.
Never open your seat belts when travelling.
Passengers must remain in the seats provided.
The doors must remain locked.
Avoid braking with a jerk.
If a navigation system is used, only change the destination when the
vehicle is stationary. Drive to a car park or stop in a safe area when
changing the destination.
Do not play DVDs using the monitor of the navigation system during the
journey.
Drive slowly on poor roads.
Take extreme care when driving onto ferries, crossing uneven roads and
driving in reverse. Because of the relatively large overhang, larger vehicles
might swing out and "touch ground" in unfavourable conditions. This can
cause damage to the underbody or to parts fitted there.
If an accident occurs as a result of these instructions not being observed,
the manufacturer will not be responsible for damages caused.
The safety measures stipulated in chapter 3 have to be observed.
If a reversing camera is installed in the vehicle, the camera is automatically
switched on when driving in reverse gear.
42 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
During the journey
5
5.2 Reversing camera
Depending on the model, a reversing camera (Fig. 11,1) with LCD monitor is
installed in the vehicle.
The camera and the LCD monitor are switched on automatically when the igni-
tion is switched on or if the vehicle's engine is running and you drive in reverse
gear.
5.3 Driving speed
5.4 Brakes
Fig. 11 Reversing camera
Refer to the unit manufacturer's separate instruction manual for details of
how to operate the LCD monitor.
The vehicle is equipped with a powerful engine. This means there are
sufficient reserves in difficult traffic situations. This high power enables
a high maximum speed and requires above-average driving ability.
The vehicle provides a large contact surface for wind. A sudden cross-
wind can be especially dangerous.
Uneven or one-sided loading affects road performance.
Driving on unknown streets, you may encounter hazardous road condi-
tions and unexpected driving situations. Therefore, in the interest of
safety, make sure your driving speed is appropriate to any given driving
situation and environment.
Adhere to the national legal speed limits.
Have defects on the braking system immediately remedied by an author-
ised specialist workshop.
Avoid block brakings. Block braking gives the tyres "brake plates" of var-
ying strength. This reduces driving comfort. It might even make the tyres
unserviceable.
43Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
During the journey
5
Before each journey Before each journey, check by means of a braking test:
Do the brakes function?
Do the brakes react evenly?
Does the vehicle remain in the lane when braking?
5.5 Seat belts
The vehicle is equipped with automatic three-point safety belts in the living
area on the seats for which seat belts are compulsory by law. National regula-
tions apply seat-belt fastening.
5.5.1 Fastening the seat belt correctly
The seat belt is fastened correctly when a fist can be passed between the body
and the seat belt.
5.6 Driver's seat and front passenger's seat
Fasten your seat belts before the beginning of the journey and keep
them fastened during the journey.
Do not damage or trap belts. Have damaged seat belts changed by an
authorised specialist workshop.
Do not alter the belt fixing devices, automatic seat belt winders and the
belt clips.
Inspect the screwed connections of the seat belts from time to time in
order to ensure that they are correctly seated.
Only use one seat belt for one adult person.
Do not belt in objects together with persons.
Seat belts are not sufficient for persons who are less than 150 cm tall. In
these cases use additional restraining devices. Observe test certificate.
Factory-set three-point safety belts must be used when attaching child
restraint systems.
After an accident, replace the seat belts.
During the journey, do not tilt the backrest too far backwards. Otherwise
the functionality of the seat belt is no longer guaranteed.
Do not twist the belt. The belt must be positioned smoothly against the
body.
When fastening the seat belt, adopt the correct sitting position.
Before commencing the journey, rotate all swivel seats in the direction
of travel and lock in position.
The seats must remain fixed in position during the journey and are not
to be rotated.
The driver's and front passenger's seat are a part of the base vehicle,
depending on model and vehicle equipment. In this case the adjustment of
the seats is described in the operating instructions of the base vehicle.
44 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
During the journey
5
Rotating seat into driving
position
The seats can be rotated in any direction. The seats can only be locked in posi-
tion in the direction of travel.
Push both armrests upward.
Push the seat backwards or into the central position.
Rotate the seat in the direction of travel and lock in position.
Adjusting seat in
lengthways direction
Adjust the driver's seat so that the driver can depress the pedals comfortably.
Pull the bar (Fig. 12,1) upwards.
Push the seat forwards or backwards.
Release the bar. The seat must audibly lock into place.
Adjusting the seat depth Adjust the seat so that the thighs rest on the seat surface.
Pull the handle (Fig. 12,2) upwards.
Push the seat forwards or backwards.
Release handle. The seat must audibly lock into place.
Setting the seat
inclination
Adjust the seat inclination so that the thighs rest on the seat surface without
any pressure.
Pull the handle (Fig. 13,3) upwards.
Bring the seat into the desired inclination position by applying or relieving
pressure.
Release handle. The seat must audibly lock into place.
Adjusting the seat height Adjust the seat height so that the thighs rest on the seat without pressure and
the driver can depress the pedals comfortably.
If the seat should move up: Pull the handle (Fig. 13,4) upwards.
If the seat should move down: Push the handle down (Fig. 13,4).
If the seat should be lowered quickly: Push the handle down (Fig. 13,5).
The seat moves into the lowest position.
If the seat should move into its normal position after quick lowering: Pull the
handle (Fig. 13,5) upwards.
Fig. 12 Operating controls in front of
the seat
Fig. 13 Operating controls next to the
seat
Rotating the seats in the pitched vehicle is described in chapter 7.
45Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
During the journey
5
Adjusting the cushioning The cushioning can be steplessly adjusted from "soft" to "hard".
Pull the handle (Fig. 13,2) upwards. The cushioning becomes "softer".
Push the handle down (Fig. 13,2). The cushioning becomes "harder".
Adjusting the backrest Adjust the angle of the backrest so that the steering wheel can be held with the
arms slightly bent.
Pull the handle (Fig. 13,8) upwards.
Bring the backrest into the desired inclination position by applying or
relieving pressure.
Release handle. The backrest must audibly lock into place.
Adjusting the lumbar
support
The chambers of the lumbar support can be adjusted separately.
Press the upper part of the switch (Fig. 13,6). The air chamber fills.
Press the lower part of the switch (Fig. 13,6). The air chamber empties.
Adjusting the armrest The height of the armrests can be steplessly adjusted.
Turn the knurled wheel (Fig. 13,1). The armrest inclines upwards or down-
wards, depending on the rotation direction.
Switching on the seat
heater
The seat heater can be adjusted in two stages.
Press the front part of the switch (Fig. 13,7). The seat heater is on. The
LED on the switch lights up.
Press the rear part of the switch (Fig. 13,7). The seat heater is switched to
fast heating. The LED on the switch lights up.
Always adjust the cushions on the driver's seat so that the feet are
always in contact with the pedals, even when the road surface is poor.
The air spring adjusts itself automatically to the person's weight.
46 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
During the journey
5
5.7 Headrests
Before commencing the journey, adjust the headrests (Fig. 14,1) so that the
back of the head is supported at approximately ear height. Push the headrests
upwards or downwards by hand.
5.8 Seating arrangement
Seats which may be used during travel are equipped with a sticker (Fig. 15).
The headrests are not adjustable for all models.
Fig. 14 Bench headrest
During the journey, persons are only to sit on the permitted seats. The
authorised number of seats is stipulated in the vehicle documents.
During the journey sitting on the divans is not permitted.
Seat belts must be worn by all passengers.
Fig. 15 "Seat" symbol
47Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
During the journey
5
5.9 Electrically adjustable external mirrors
Depending on the model, the vehicle is equipped with two electrically adjust-
able and heated external mirrors. The switches for external mirror adjustment
and the mirror heater are on the dashboard.
Adjusting:
Select the mirror to be adjusted. To do so, push the flip switch (Fig. 16,1)
to the left or right.
Adjust the mirror by pressing the switch (Fig. 16,2) in the appropriate direc-
tion.
Switching on the heater:
Press the switch (Fig. 17,1) on the dashboard. The switch indicator lamp
shows it is in operation.
5.10 Sun visors
Depending on the model, the vehicle has two electrically operated sun visors
(Fig. 18,1).
The switches for operating the sun visors are each installed in outside of the
panelling on the left and right.
Extending the sun visor:
Press the lower part of the switch (Fig. 19,1). The sun visor moves down.
When the desired position is reached or the sun visor has been completely
extended: Release the switch.
Retracting the sun visor:
Press the upper part of the switch (Fig. 19,1). The sun visor moves up.
When the desired position is reached or the sun visor has been completely
retracted: Release the switch.
Fig. 16 Switch for electrically adjust-
able external mirrors
Fig. 17 Switch for mirror heater
Fig. 18 Sun visor Fig. 19 Sun visor switch
48 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
During the journey
5
5.11 Pneumatic spring
5.11.1 Pneumatic spring (Goldschmidt)
The pneumatic springs of circuits 1 and 2 can be controlled separately via the
operating switches (Fig. 20,1 and 5).
Increasing the pressure in
the pneumatic springs:
Press up the operating switch (Fig. 20,1 or 5) on the control unit (Fig. 20,3).
When doing so, monitor the pressure on the pressure gauge (Fig. 20,2
or 4).
Reducing the pressure in
the pneumatic springs:
Press down the operating switch (Fig. 20,1 or 5) on the control unit
(Fig. 20,3). When doing so, monitor the pressure on the pressure gauge
(Fig. 20,2 or 4).
Overheating protection The system has automatic overheating protection. When the overheating pro-
tection responds, allow the system to cool down for at least 30 minutes.
Only drive at a steady, low speed if there is a fault with the pneumatic
spring and have the fault immediately repaired by an authorised spe-
cialist workshop.
Do not allow children to play with the system.
The compressor becomes very hot during operation. Do not touch the
compressor during operation and for a short time after operation.
Only operate the system when the vehicle is stationary and the engine is
running.
Do not exceed the maximum permissible pressure of 9 bar (130 PSI).
Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction
manual.
Fig. 20 Control unit for pneumatic
spring
1 Operating switch for pneumatic
springs (circuit 1)
2 Pressure gauge (circuit 1)
3 Control unit
4 Pressure gauge (circuit 2)
5 Operating switch for pneumatic
springs (circuit 2)
49Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
During the journey
5
5.11.2 Pneumatic spring (VB-airsuspension)
The pneumatic spring provides the vehicle with fully automatic levelling con-
trol.
Various pneumatic spring functions can also be switched manually via the but-
tons on the remote control. The increase of ground clearance simplifies e.g.
driving onto ferries (bigger gradient angle) or driving on rough terrain.
A short beeping tone is sounded when a button is pressed.
Only drive at a steady, low speed if there is a fault with the pneumatic
spring and have the fault immediately repaired by an authorised spe-
cialist workshop.
Only operate the remote control, if people or objects are not in the
working area under the vehicle.
Do not allow children to play with the system.
The compressor becomes very hot during operation. Do not touch the
compressor during operation and for a short time after operation.
Only raise or lower the vehicle when parked.
Before raising or lowering, always apply the handbrake and put the gear
into the neutral position ("take out" gear).
Depending on the model, not all the functions described here are available
at all times.
Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction
manual.
Fig. 21 Remote control
1 Indicator lamp
2 Sport function button
3 Parking function button
4 Raise button
5 Lower button
6 Axle selection display
7 Axle selection button
8 Service button
9 Saved level 2 button
10 Saved level 1 button
11 Off road function button
12 Levelling function button
All button functions are available only if the ignition has been switched on
and the engine is running. In addition, the button functions remain available
for 1 hour after the ignition has been switched off (run-down time).
50 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
During the journey
5
The following functions can be selected via the buttons:
Button Function
SPORT
(Fig. 21,2)
Switching sport function on and off.
When the sport function is activated, the vehicle is lowered and
its driving stability is increased.
CAR PARK
(Fig. 21,3)
Switching parking function on and off.
When the parking function is activated, the vehicle is lowered
to the lowest possible level. This simplifies e.g. driving into a
garage with a low clearance height.
When this function is activated, never drive faster
than 25 km/h. When this speed is exceeded, the
function is automatically deactivated and the vehicle
is raised to the normal level.
(Fig. 21,4)
Raising the vehicle.
Possibility A: Press the button briefly in order to raise the
vehicle to one of the three levels that have been prepro-
grammed at the factory.
Possibility B: Press button until the required level or the
highest position is reached.
(Fig. 21,5)
Lowering the vehicle.
Possibility A: Press the button briefly in order to lower the
vehicle to one of the three levels that have been prepro-
grammed at the factory.
Possibility B: Press button until the required level or the
lowest position is reached.
FRONT REAR
(Fig. 21,7)
Axle selection.
Possibility A: Press the button briefly in order to change
between the pneumatic spring for the front axle and the one
for the rear axle.
Possibility B: Press the button for longer in order to change
to the pneumatic spring of both axles.
The blue lamps in the wheels of the illustrated vehicle
(Fig. 21,6) show which axle is activated for operation.
SERVICE
(Fig. 21,8)
Activating or deactivating the system or ending the run-down
time.
51Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
During the journey
5
The indicator lamps in the buttons and on the remote control show the oper-
ating states of the individual functions.
5.12 Bonnet
M1 (Fig. 21,10)
M2 (Fig. 21,9)
Raising or lowering to the saved level. Press the button briefly
to do this.
Save:
Bring the vehicle to the desired level using the buttons " "
and " ".
Keep the memory button "M1" or "M2" pressed until a long
beeping tone is sounded.
The selected level has been saved.
OFF ROAD
(Fig. 21,11)
Activating and deactivating the off road function.
When the off road function is activated, the vehicle is raised to
give it more ground clearance.
AUTO LEVEL
(Fig. 21,12)
Activating and deactivating the levelling function.
When the levelling function is activated, the vehicle is aligned
horizontally (e.g. on an uneven parking site).
If you drive with the levelling function activated, the
function is automatically switched off when a speed of
8 km/h is exceeded, and the vehicle is adjusted to the
normal level.
Button Function
LED Signification Status
Blue or green
LED in the func-
tion button
Off Function inactive
Flashing The system is carrying out the selected
function
Illuminated The selected function is active
Red LED in the
service button
Off Function inactive
Illuminated Function active. The system is deacti-
vated
Red LED
"CHECK"
Off The system is operating without faults
Lights up
briefly
The system has started up without any
problems
Flashing There is a fault in the system. For trou-
bleshooting, see the section 15.2.2
When the bonnet is open, there is a risk of injury in the engine compart-
ment.
Even if the engine was switched off some time ago, it might still be hot.
Danger of burns!
Do not work in the engine compartment while the engine is running.
The bonnet must be kept firmly closed and locked during the journey.
After closing, check whether the lock has engaged. In order to carry this
out, pull on the bonnet.
52 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
During the journey
5
Opening: Pull the lever (Fig. 22,1) situated on the left-hand side of the vehicle under
the dashboard. The bonnet opens as far as the safety hook allows.
Reach under the bonnet with one hand and actuate the safety hook
(Fig. 23,2). To do this, turn the extension (Fig. 23,1) in an anticlockwise
direction.
Move the bonnet in an arch forwards and downwards.
Closing:
Move the bonnet in an arch upwards and backwards until the latch
engages audibly in place.
Check whether the bonnet is locked correctly. In order to carry this out, pull
on the bonnet.
5.13 Filliing with washer fluid
Unlock and open the bonnet.
Remove the lid (Fig. 24,1) from the filler neck of the washer fluid container.
Slowly fill in washer fluid.
Push the lid onto the filler neck of the washer fluid container.
5.14 Refilling cooling water
Fig. 22 Release lever on the inside of
the bonnet
Fig. 23 Release lever on the outside of
the bonnet
Fig. 24 Washer fluid container filler
neck
Allow the coolant to cool down before opening the cooling system. Risk
of scalding!
Allow the cooling system to cool down before opening. The cooling
system is under high pressure when it is hot. There is a risk of injury.
53Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
During the journey
5
Loosen the two screws (Fig. 25,1) and take off the cover (Fig. 25,2).
Unscrew six hexagon socket screws (Fig. 26,1) and remove them with the
washers.
Remove cover (Fig. 26,2).
Open the cover (Fig. 27,1) carefully and allow the pressure to escape.
Remove the cover and top up with cooling water from a suitable vessel
(e.g. a bottle).
Screw the cover (Fig. 27,1) back onto the cooling water compensator res-
ervoir.
Screw both covers (Fig. 26,2 and Fig. 25,2) securely back in place.
5.15 Filling up with diesel
The fuel filler neck is situated on the exterior of the vehicle, at the front left.
Fig. 25 Cover in the dashboard Fig. 26 Engine compartment cover
Fig. 27 Cover on the cooling water
compensator reservoir
No appliance operated by a naked flame (e.g. heater or refrigerator) may
be in operation when filling the tank, on ferries or in the garage. Danger
of explosion!
Depending on the model, the fuel filler neck is part of the base vehicle. In
this case, filling the tank is described in the operating manual of the base
vehicle.
The fuel filler neck is labelled with the word "Diesel".
54 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
During the journey
5
Opening: Swivel the flap (Fig. 28,2) to the side.
Insert the key in the locking cylinder (Fig. 28,1) and turn it in an anticlock-
wise direction.
Remove the cap.
Closing:
Place the cap on the fuel filler neck.
Turn key in a clockwise direction.
Remove the key.
Check that the cap is fastened securely on the fuel filler neck.
Close flap.
Fig. 28 Cap for the fuel filler neck
55Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Pitching the motorhome
6
6Pitching the motorhome
Chapter overview
This chapter contains instructions on how to pitch the vehicle.
The instructions address the following topics:
handbrake
entrance step
wheel chocks
operation of the supports
240 V connection
6.1 Handbrake
Firmly apply the handbrake when parking the vehicle.
6.2 Entrance step
In order to exit the vehicle, first fully extend the entrance step.
6.3 Wheel chocks
When parking the vehicle on slopes or inclines use the wheel chocks.
If the maximum permissible gross weight of the vehicle exceeds 4 tonnes,
wheel chocks must be used when parking on gradients. The wheel chocks are
provided as standard for vehicles with a maximum permissible gross weight
exceeding 4 tonnes.
6.4 Supports
6.4.1 General instructions
Pitch the vehicle so that it is as horizontal as possible. Secure the vehicle
to prevent it from rolling.
Animals (especially mice) can cause great damage to the interior of the
vehicle. To prevent this from happening, regularly check the vehicle for
damages or animal traces after pitching.
If there is any risk of frost, release the handbrake every now and then and
apply it again. This will prevent it from freezing or rusting. Prior to releasing
the handbrake, secure the vehicle so that is cannot roll away.
Do not use the fitted supports as a vehicle jack. They supports are only for
stabilising the parked vehicle to prevent the rear axle from bottoming out.
When pitching the vehicle, ensure that the supports are evenly loaded.
Before driving away, wind up the supports as far as they can go, fully retract
and secure them.
When the ground is soft, place a pad or block under the supports in order
to prevent the vehicle from sinking into the ground.
56 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Pitching the motorhome
6
6.4.2 Steady legs
In order to ensure their correct function, clean and grease the interior tubes of
the steady legs regularly.
Extending:
Place the socket spanner on the hexagon nut (Fig. 29,1) and rotate. The
steady leg swings downward and is automatically extended.
Rotate the hexagonal nut until the steady leg rests completely on the
ground and the motorhome is in a horizontal position.
Retracting:
Place the socket spanner on the hexagon nut (Fig. 29,1) and rotate until
the steady leg is clear of the ground.
Rotate the hexagonal nut with the socket spanner until the steady leg has
swung upwards and the guide disc (Fig. 29,3) has completely retracted into
the notch (Fig. 29,2).
6.4.3 Electrical steady legs
Make sure that all steady legs are retracted completely and that the guide
disc for each steady leg has been completely retracted into the notch.
Fig. 29 Steady leg
The engine can then also be left on (to charge the batteries) if the steady
legs are extended. Before moving off, always check that the steady legs
are retracted completely (observe warning light and warning tone).
Only extend and retract the steady legs if the areas around the legs are
totally clear of obstacles.
Steady legs need sufficient ground clearance to be able to fold out verti-
cally.
Before operating the steady legs, release the handbrake.
Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction
manual.
57Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Pitching the motorhome
6
Activating: Park vehicle on even and stable ground and secure against rolling.
Switch on ignition. Green LED (Fig. 30,2) flashes for approx. 6 seconds,
acoustic signal sounds.
Check LED indicator.
Fig. 30 Display Fig. 31 Remote control
LED indica-
tor
Signification
LED indicator
Green LED
(Fig. 30,2) on
Steady legs retracted completely, system ready to operate
Green LED
(Fig. 30,2) on,
red LED
(Fig. 30,1) on
Steady legs extended, system ready to operate
Button Function
Button functions
UP
(Fig. 31,6)
Retract steady leg (Start/Stop)
< 1 second = single steady leg
> 1 second + button "1" = two steady legs
DOWN
(Fig. 31,1)
Extend steady leg (Start/Stop)
< 1 second = single steady leg
> 1 second + button "2" = all four steady legs
1
(Fig. 31,5)
Front steady leg, left
< 1 second = selects steady leg
> 1 second + button "2" = automatic levelling
> 1 second + "UP" button = retracts two steady legs
2
(Fig. 31,2)
Front steady leg, right
< 1 second = selects steady leg
> 1 second + "DOWN" button = extends all steady legs
3
(Fig. 31,4)
Rear steady leg, left
< 1 second = selects steady leg
> 8 seconds + button "4" = activates the system after system
shutdown
4
(Fig. 31,3)
Rear steady leg, right
< 1 second = selects steady leg
> 8 seconds + button "3" = activates the system after system
shutdown
58 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Pitching the motorhome
6
Extending: Select steady leg.
Briefly press the "DOWN" button (Fig. 31,1). Steady leg swings downwards
and extends.
Shortly before the steady leg reaches the ground, press the "DOWN"
button again. The procedure is stopped.
Extend all four steady legs in the same way.
Press buttons "1" (Fig. 31,5) and "2" (Fig. 31,2) for a few seconds. Vehicle
is automatically aligned horizontally.
Check if all the steady legs are touching the ground.
If necessary, select a steady leg and extend to the ground with the "DOWN"
button.
Retracting:
Select steady leg.
Briefly press the "UP" button (Fig. 31,6). Steady leg retracts and swings
upwards. When the end position has been reached, the system stops auto-
matically.
Retract all four steady legs in the same way.
Emergency operation:
Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling.
Lift vehicle using the vehicle jack until the steady leg is clear of the ground.
Move steady leg back and fix to chassis.
Contact customer service.
6.4.4 Electrical-hydraulic steady legs
The engine can be started (in order to charge the batteries) even if the
steady legs are extended. Before moving off, always check that the
steady legs are retracted completely (observe warning light and warning
tone).
Only extend or retract the steady legs if the lifting area and the area
around the legs are clear of obstacles.
There must be no persons or animals close by when the system is in
operation. The system is under high pressure. Escaping fluids can
cause serious injury.
Always apply the handbrake before operating the steady legs.
Persons or animals inside the vehicle must remain still while the steady
legs are being extended. Otherwise, the controller mechanism will be dis-
turbed.
Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction
manual.
59Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Pitching the motorhome
6
LED indicators The LED indicators (Fig. 32,2) are only visible when the respective situation
occurs. The following situations are indicated:
Vehicle tilted too much (vehicle symbol)
Battery voltage too low (battery symbol)
Handbrake not applied (brake symbol)
Steady leg not fully retracted (steady leg symbol)
Manual operation activated (hand symbol)
Operation The steady legs can be extended manually or automatically. The zero point
must be set prior to automatic extension.
Activating:
Park vehicle on even and stable ground and secure against rolling.
Apply the handbrake.
Switch on ignition.
Setting the zero point:
Align the vehicle manually using a spirit level.
Press the On/Off switch (Fig. 32,3).
Press the front side button (Fig. 32,7) five times.
Press the rear side button (Fig. 32,10) five times. All LEDs flash.
Press the retract steady legs button (Fig. 32,6) three times and wait for
20 seconds. The zero point is now saved.
Fig. 32 Control unit, steady legs
1 Company logo
2 LED indicators (symbols)
3 On/Off switch
4 Manual operation button
5 Automatic operation button
6 Retract steady legs button
7 Front side button
8 Level LED
9 Right side button
10 Rear side button
11 Left side button
60 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Pitching the motorhome
6
Extending the steady legs
automatically:
Activate the system.
Press the On/Off switch (Fig. 32,3). The LED with the company logo
(Fig. 32,1) lights up.
Press the automatic operation button (Fig. 32,5). When the green level
LED (Fig. 32,8) lights up, the support process has been completed.
Press the On/Off switch (Fig. 32,3) to switch off the system.
Extending the steady legs
manually:
Activate the system.
Press the On/Off switch (Fig. 32,3).
Press the manual operation button (Fig. 32,4) until the LEDs in the direc-
tion arrows light up.
Press the front side button (Fig. 32,7) until the steady legs reach the
ground.
Press the rear side button (Fig. 32,10) until the steady legs reach the
ground.
If the arrow is pointing towards the front side of the vehicle: Press the front
side button (Fig. 32,7) until the arrow goes out.
If the arrow is pointing towards the rear side of the vehicle: Press the rear
side button (Fig. 32,10) until the arrow goes out.
If the arrow is pointing towards the left side of the vehicle: Press the left side
button (Fig. 32,11) until the arrow goes out and the level LED (Fig. 32,8)
lights up.
If the arrow is pointing towards the right side of the vehicle: Press the right
side button (Fig. 32,9) until the arrow goes out and the level LED (Fig. 32,8)
lights up.
Press the On/Off switch (Fig. 32,3) to switch off the system.
Retracting the steady legs:
Press the On/Off switch (Fig. 32,3).
Briefly press the retract steady legs button (Fig. 32,6) (automatic operation)
or keep it pressed until the steady legs are fully retracted (manual opera-
tion).
Press the On/Off switch (Fig. 32,3) to switch off the system.
Check whether all steady legs are fully retracted.
6.5 240 V connection
The vehicle can be connected to a 240 V power supply (see chapter 9).
6.6 Awning
Always steady the vehicle at the front first.
Retract the awning in strong wind, rain or snow.
In the case of light rain, shorten one of the support legs so that water can
run off.
Only retract the awning when the fabric is dry. When the awning must be
retracted while the fabric is still wet: Extend the awning as soon as pos-
sible, in order to dry out the fabric.
Before retracting, remove leaves and coarse dirt from the awning.
61Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Pitching the motorhome
6
Advantages of the awning The advantages of an awning are:
The awning provides shade.
The awning creates a covered vestibule and thus expands the space.
The vehicle thus becomes more homelike.
Putting up the awning:
Press the button (Fig. 33,3) on the remote control (Fig. 33,4). The awning
extends.
When the awning is extended: Set up the brackets.
Retracting the awning:
Fold in the brackets.
Press the button (Fig. 33,1) on the remote control (Fig. 33,4). The awning
retracts.
Only use the awning for protection against the sun.
Also read the manufacturer's instruction manual.
Fig. 33 Remote control
1Retracting
2Stop
3 Extending
4 Remote control
The movement of the awning can be stopped with the Stop button
(Fig. 33,2).
62 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Pitching the motorhome
6
63Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Living
7
7Living
Chapter overview
This chapter contains instructions about living in the vehicle.
The instructions address the following topics:
opening and closing the doors, the external flaps and the driver's cabin par-
tition
ventilation of the vehicle
opening and closing the windows and blinds
opening and closing the shades in the driver's cabin
opening and closing the skylights
rotating the seats
modifying the table surfaces
converting tables
operating the central locking on the kitchen unit
positioning the television
lamps
light switches
light control
remote control for lighting and entrance step
extending the seating groups
use of the beds
7.1 Doors
Only drive with locked doors.
Locking the doors can prevent them from opening of their own accord, e.g.
during an accident.
Locked doors also prevent forced entry, e.g. when waiting at traffic lights.
However, in an emergency, locked doors make it more difficult for helpers
to enter the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always lock the doors.
Depending on the model, the locks of the driver's and the front passenger's
doors are part of the base vehicle. In this case, the opening and closing of
the driver's door and the front passenger's door is described in the oper-
ating manual of the base vehicle.
64 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Living
7
7.1.1 Conversion door, outside
Opening: Insert the key into locking cylinder and turn until the door lock is unlatched.
Return the key to the central position and remove it.
Pull on the handle. The door is open.
Locking:
Insert the key into locking cylinder and turn until the door lock is engaged.
Return the key to the central position and remove it.
7.1.2 Conversion door, outside (Hartal)
Opening: Insert the key into locking cylinder (Fig. 35,2) and turn until the door lock is
unlatched.
Return the key to the central position and remove it.
Pull on the handle (Fig. 35,1). The door is open.
Locking:
Insert the key into locking cylinder (Fig. 35,2) and turn until the door lock is
engaged.
Return the key to the central position and remove it.
Fig. 34 Door lock of conversion door,
outside
Fig. 35 Door lock of conversion door,
outside
65Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Living
7
7.1.3 Conversion door, inside
Opening: Push the handle (Fig. 36,1).
Locking:
Push the lever (Fig. 36,2) down.
7.1.4 Conversion door, inside (Hartal)
Opening: Pull on the handle (Fig. 37,1). The door lock is unlatched.
Locking:
Turn the safety knob (Fig. 37,2) in a clockwise direction.
7.1.5 Window conversion door
The conversion door window is fitted with an insect screen and blind.
Opening the window:
Press the retainer (Fig. 38,3) back.
Press the handle (Fig. 38,2) together and push the window down.
Fig. 36 Door lock of conversion door,
inside, open
Fig. 37 Door lock of conversion door,
inside
Fig. 38 Window in the conversion door Fig. 39 Blind
66 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Living
7
Closing the window: Push the window up until the handle (Fig. 38,2) engages in the lock
(Fig. 38,1).
Insect screen To close and open the insect screen:
Closing:
Grasp the bottom rod of the insect screen and guide it to the bottom rod of
the blind.
Lock catch in place.
Continuous adjustment of the blinds may be made by moving the bottom
rods.
Opening:
Hold the bottom rod of the insect screen and activate the catch.
Return the bottom rod of the insect screen to the limit stop on the screen.
7.1.6 Window of conversion door (Hartal)
The conversion door window is fitted with a Roman shade.
Closing:
Grip the Roman shade (Fig. 40,2) in the middle of the bar (Fig. 40,1), pull
it upwards and then release it at the desired height. The Roman shade will
stay at this height.
Opening:
Grip the Roman shade in the middle of the bar and push it down.
7.1.7 Folding insect screen on the conversion door
Fig. 40 Roman shade
Open the insect screen completely before closing the conversion door.
67Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Living
7
Closing: Pull out the insect screen completely by the bar (Fig. 41,1).
Opening:
Push the insect screen into its initial position by the bar (Fig. 41,1).
7.2 External flaps
The external flaps fitted to the vehicle are all fitted with identical locking cylin-
ders. Therefore, all locks can be opened with a single key.
7.2.1 Flap lock with recessed handle
Opening: Insert key into locking cylinder (Fig. 42,1) and turn a quarter turn. The flap
lock is unlatched.
Remove the key.
Pull on the lock handle (Fig. 42,2). The external flap is open.
Swivel the external flap upwards and hold it.
Fig. 41 Insect screen
Before commencing the journey, close all external flaps and lock them.
To open and close the external flap, open or close all locks that are fitted
to the external flap.
When leaving the vehicle, close all external flaps.
To open the external flap, pull all the lock handles fitted to that particular
external flap at the same time.
Fig. 42 Flap lock with recessed handle Fig. 43 External flap, open
68 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Living
7
Pull out the lever (Fig. 43,2) and turn it upwards a quarter turn.
Lean the external flap (Fig. 43,1) against the lever.
Closing:
Hold the external flap (Fig. 43,1).
Turn the lever (Fig. 43,2) down a quarter turn and push it in.
Firmly close the external flap.
Insert key into locking cylinder and turn a quarter turn. The flap lock is
locked.
Remove the key.
7.2.2 Flap lock with separate locking cylinder
In the case of models fitted with central locking systems, the flap lock is con-
nected to the central locking system.
Opening:
Pull on the lock handle (Fig. 44,1). The external flap swings up and is held
in place by the gas pressure spring (Fig. 45).
Proceed as follows when the external flap is locked:
Fold up the cover (Fig. 44,2).
Insert key into locking cylinder and turn a quarter turn. The flap lock is
unlatched.
Remove the key.
Closing:
Press down the external flap (Fig. 45,2) against the resistance of the gas
pressure spring (Fig. 45,1).
Firmly close the external flap.
Proceed as follows when the external flap is to be locked:
Fold up the cover (Fig. 44,2).
Insert key into locking cylinder and turn a quarter turn. The flap lock is
locked.
Remove the key.
Fig. 44 Flap lock with separate locking
cylinder
Fig. 45 External flap, open
In the final phase of closing, the external flap drops down automatically
due to its weight. When closing, do not hold the external flap at the edge.
There is a risk of crushing your hands.
69Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Living
7
7.2.3 Sliding drawer
Opening: Open the external flap as described above.
Pull the safeguard (Fig. 46,1) upwards.
Pull out the sliding drawer (Fig. 46,2).
Loosen the tension belts (Fig. 46,3).
7.3 Driver's cabin partition
Lock on the living area
side
To close and open the driver's cabin partition:
Closing:
Release and close door (Fig. 47,1).
Turn the handle (Fig. 47,2) in an anticlockwise direction until the door is
locked.
Opening:
Turn the handle (Fig. 47,2) in a clockwise direction until the door is
unlocked.
Open the door (Fig. 47,1) and secure it.
Do not place loads weighing more than 40 kg into the sliding drawer.
Always fasten the boxes with the tension belts before commencing the
journey.
Fig. 46 Sliding drawer
Only drive with the door secured.
Fig. 47 Driver's cabin partition Fig. 48 Driver's cabin lock
70 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Living
7
Lock on the driver's cabin
side
To close and open the driver's cabin partition:
Closing:
Release the door (Fig. 47,1) and close it with the handle (Fig. 48,2).
Insert the key into locking cylinder (Fig. 48,1) and turn in a clockwise direc-
tion until the door is locked.
Opening:
Insert key into locking cylinder and turn it in an anticlockwise direction.
Open the door and secure it.
7.4 Ventilation
Condensation Ensure that there is a continuous exchange of air by providing frequent and
efficient ventilation. This is the only method for ensuring that condensation and
resulting mould is not formed during cool weather. During the colder season,
a pleasant living climate is created if heating output, air distribution and venti-
lation are synchronized. To avoid draft close the air outlet nozzles on the dash-
board and set the air distribution of the base vehicle to air circulation.
If the vehicle is laid up for a longer period, occasionally ventilate it well, espe-
cially in summer as heat accumulation can occur. Do not only air the interior,
but also the storage compartments which are accessible from the outside. Air
the parking place as well if the vehicle is parked in a closed space (e.g.
garage). The occurrence of condensation could lead to the formation of mould.
7.5 Windows
The oxygen in the vehicle interior is used up by breathing and the use of
gas operated appliances. That is why the oxygen needs to be replaced
on a constant basis. For this purpose, forced ventilation options (e.g.
skylights with forced ventilation, mushroom-shaped vents or floor vents)
are fitted to the vehicle. Never cover or block forced ventilations from the
inside or outside with objects such as e.g. a winter mat. Keep forced ven-
tilations clear of snow and leaves. There is a danger of suffocation due
to increased CO
2
levels.
Although sufficient ventilation is provided, in certain weather conditions,
condensation can form on metal objects (e.g. screwed connections in the
floor).
Additional cold spots can occur at thermal "bridges" (e.g. mushroom-
shaped vents, skylight edges, sockets, filler necks, flaps, etc.).
The windows are fitted with a blind or Roman shade and with an insect
screen or folding insect screen. After the latch has been released, the blind
and insect screen automatically spring back to the initial position by tensile
force. In order not to damage the tension mechanics, hold onto the blind or
insect screen and allow it to slowly return to the initial position. The Roman
shade and folding insect screen are made of thin woven fabric. In order not
to damage the Roman shade or the insect screen, grasp the respective
handle and carefully return it to the initial position.
Do not keep blinds closed over a longer period of time as that can cause
increased material wear.
71Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Living
7
7.5.1 Hinged window with automatic hinges (with safety knob)
Opening: Press the safety knob (Fig. 49,3) down and hold it.
Turn the catch lever (Fig. 49,4) a quarter turn towards the centre of the
window.
Open the hinged window until the required locking position is reached; the
automatic hinge (Fig. 50,1) automatically locks in place.
The hinged window remains locked in the required position.
Closing:
Open the hinged window as wide as necessary until the latch releases.
Close the hinged window.
Press the safety knob (Fig. 49,3) down and hold it.
Turn the catch lever (Fig. 49,4) a quarter turn towards the window frame.
The fork (Fig. 49,2) on the catch lever is entirely on the inner side of the
window catch (Fig. 49,1).
If the blind or the Roman shade is completely closed, exposure to direct
sunlight can cause heat to accumulate between the blind/the Roman shade
and the glass window. The window could be damaged. For that reason,
close the blind/Roman shade only 2/3 of the way in direct sunlight.
Before commencing the journey, close the windows.
Depending on the weather, close the windows far enough to prevent mois-
ture from entering.
To open and close the hinged window, open or close all catch levers which
are fitted to the hinged window.
When leaving the vehicle, always close the windows.
In extreme weather conditions or if the temperature fluctuates strongly, a
light condensation film can form on the double-glazed acrylic glass. The
glass is designed in such a way that condensation can evaporate when the
external temperature increases. There is no danger of the double-glazed
acrylic glass being damaged by condensation.
Open the window completely, to release the lock. If the locking device is
not released and the window is closed nevertheless, there is the danger of
the window breaking due to the massive counter-pressure.
When opening the hinged windows, ensure that there are no torsional
forces. Open and close the hinged windows evenly.
If the catch lever is equipped with a safety knob, press the safety knob
when operating the catch lever.
Fig. 49 Catch lever with safety knob in
"closed" position
Fig. 50 Hinged window with automatic
hinges
72 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Living
7
Continuous ventilation With the catch lever, the hinged window can be placed in two positions:
"Continuous ventilation" (Fig. 51)
Firmly closed (Fig. 49)
To place the hinged window into the "continuous ventilation" position:
Press the safety knob (Fig. 51,3) down and hold it.
Turn the catch lever (Fig. 51,4) a quarter turn towards the centre of the
window.
Lightly open the hinged window outwards.
Press the safety knob (Fig. 51,3) down and hold it.
Return catch lever to its initial position. Move the fork (Fig. 51,2) on the
catch lever into the window catch (Fig. 51,1).
Make certain that the safety knob is not pushed in but rather that it secures
the catch lever.
During the journey, the hinged window may not be in "continuous ventilation"
position.
If it rains, the "continuous ventilation" hinged window position could lead to
splashing water penetrating the living area. Therefore, close the hinged win-
dows completely.
7.5.2 Sliding window with lock
Opening: Press the lock (Fig. 52,2) upwards.
Press handle (Fig. 52,1) and push it forward or backward at the same time.
Open window half up to the required position.
Fig. 51 Catch lever with safety knob in
"continuous ventilation" posi-
tion
Fig. 52 Sliding window with pressure
lock
73Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Living
7
Closing: Close the window as far as it can go.
Push the lock downwards.
7.5.3 Sliding window without lock
Opening: Press handle (Fig. 53,1) and push or pull it forward at the same time.
Open window half up to the required position.
Closing:
Close the window as far as possible and let the handle lock in place.
7.5.4 Gathered blinds
Depending on the model, the vehicle is fitted with gathered blinds.
Gathering the blind:
Pull down the cord weight (Fig. 54,1). The cords pull up and gather the
blind.
Press the cord weight (Fig. 55,2) onto the Velcro (Fig. 55,1).
Lowering the blind:
Remove the the cord weight (Fig. 55,2) from the Velcro (Fig. 55,1).
Guide the cord weight slowly upwards. The bottom rod pulls the blind
down.
7.5.5 Blind and insect screen
Fig. 53 Sliding window without lock
Fig. 54 Gathered blind Fig. 55 Cord weight
Depending on the window size, the blinds are fitted with one or two lock
mechanisms.
Before commencing the journey, lock the insect screen into the blind and
lock the blind into the first locking position. This helps to avoid vibration
noises during the journey.
74 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Living
7
The windows are fitted with a blind and an insect screen. The blind and insect
screen can be adjusted separately.
Blind The blind is located in the bottom blind box.
Closing:
Press handle (Fig. 56,4) and draw blind (Fig. 56,5) from the bottom to the
top up to the desired height.
Release handle. Blind locks into the nearest locking position.
Opening:
Clench handle (Fig. 56,4). Latch is released.
Slowly guide blind (Fig. 56,5) into its initial position.
Insect screen The insect screen is located in the upper blind box.
Closing:
Pull insect screen (Fig. 56,2) down until it touches the blind (Fig. 56,5).
Depending on the model, engage the closure latches (Fig. 56,1) or the one
closure latch in the locks (Fig. 56,3) or the one lock.
Opening:
Depending on the model, release both locks (Fig. 56,3) or the one lock.
Slowly return insect screen into its initial position.
7.5.6 Roman shade and insect screen
Insect screen Depending on the frame fitting, the insect screen is fitted into the window
frame at the top or bottom.
Fig. 56 Hinged window
Fig. 57 Hinged window
75Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Living
7
Closing: Hold the bottom rod of the insect screen in the centre and pull it down care-
fully towards the bottom rod of the Roman shade.
Let the catch on the bottom rod of the insect screen snap into the Roman
shade.
Continuous adjustment of the insect screen may be made by moving the
bottom rods.
Opening:
Push the bottom rods towards the Roman shade.
Hold the bottom rod of the insect screen in the middle and activate the
catch.
Carefully return the bottom rod of the insect screen to the limit stop on the
frame.
Roman shade Depending on the frame fitting, the Roman shade is fitted into the window
frame at the top or bottom.
Closing:
Hold the bottom rod of the Roman shade in the centre and pull it carefully
towards the bottom rod of the insect screen.
Let the catch on the bottom rod of the Roman shade snap into the insect
screen.
Continuous adjustment of the Roman shade may be made by moving the
bottom rods.
Opening:
Push the bottom rods towards the insect screen.
Hold the bottom rod of the Roman shade in the centre and activate the
catch on the bottom rod of the insect screen.
Carefully return the bottom rod of the Roman shade to the limit stop on the
frame.
7.5.7 Blind for the windscreen
The switch for operating the blind is installed in the panelling on the left next
to the driver's seat.
Closing:
Press the left button (Fig. 59,2). The blind (Fig. 58,1) moves down.
Opening:
Press the right button (Fig. 59,1). The blind (Fig. 58,1) moves up.
Fig. 58 Blind, windscreen Fig. 59 Switch for blind, windscreen
76 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Living
7
7.5.8 Roman shades for driver's window and front passenger's
window
Closing: Grasp the handle (Fig. 60,2) of the Roman shades and draw carefully until
the magnetic catch keeps the Roman shades closed.
Opening:
Using the handle, carefully push back the Roman shades.
Push the handle (Fig. 60,2) onto the cap (Fig. 60,1). The Roman shade is
secured.
7.6 Skylights
Depending on the model, skylights with or without forced ventilation are fitted
to the vehicle. If a skylight is fitted without forced ventilation, the forced venti-
lation is performed using mushroom-shaped vents.
Fig. 60 Roman shade, driver's cabin
window
The apertures for forced ventilation must always be kept open. Never
cover or block forced ventilations with objects such as e.g. a winter mat.
Keep forced ventilations clear of snow and leaves.
The skylights are fitted with a blind or Roman shade and with an insect
screen or folding insect screen. After the latch has been released, the blind
and insect screen automatically spring back to the initial position by tensile
force. In order not to damage the tension mechanics, hold onto the blind or
insect screen and allow it to slowly return to the initial position. The Roman
shade and folding insect screen are made of thin woven fabric. In order not
to damage the Roman shade or the insect screen, grasp the respective
handle and carefully return it to the initial position.
Do not keep blinds closed over a longer period of time as that can cause
increased material wear.
If the blind or the Roman shade is completely closed, exposure to direct
sunlight can cause heat to accumulate between the blind/the Roman shade
and the skylight. The skylight could be damaged. For that reason, close the
blind/Roman shade only 2/3 of the way in direct sunlight. Open the skylight
slightly or move it to ventilation position.
Depending on the weather, close the skylights far enough to prevent mois-
ture from entering.
Do not climb on the skylights.
Before commencing the journey, close the skylights.
77Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Living
7
7.6.1 Skylight with snap latch
The skylight can be pushed upwards either from one side or from both sides.
Opening:
Pull on the handle (Fig. 61,5).
Fold insect screen (Fig. 61,4) downward.
Push the spring-loaded latch (Fig. 61,1) towards the inside of the skylight
(Fig. 61,8). At the same time use the handle (Fig. 61,2) to press the skylight
upwards.
Swing insect screen upwards (Fig. 61,4) until it latches in place.
Closing:
Pull on the handle (Fig. 61,5).
Fold insect screen (Fig. 61,4) downward.
Using both handles (Fig. 61,2), pull down the skylight (Fig. 61,8) with force
until the two snap latches (Fig. 61,1) lock into place.
Swing insect screen upwards (Fig. 61,4) until it latches in place.
Blind To close and open the blind:
Closing:
Pull the handle (Fig. 61,7) of the blind and hook the hook rail (Fig. 61,3) into
the retainer (Fig. 61,6) on the insect screen.
Opening:
Release the hook rail (Fig. 61,3) from the retainer (Fig. 61,6) and feed the
blind back slowly.
Before commencing the journey, check that the skylights are closed and
locked.
Before commencing the journey, open the blinds or Roman shades.
Apply talc to the rubber seals of the skylights at least once a year.
When leaving the vehicle, always close the skylights.
Fig. 61 Skylight with snap latch
78 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Living
7
7.6.2 Hinged skylight
The hinged skylight may be opened on one side only. Three inclination angles
and a ventilation position are available.
An extension hook is included as standard equipment.
Opening:
Turn the lever (Fig. 62,1 or Fig. 63,3) one quarter turn.
Grip lever and push hinged skylight upwards.
Closing:
Grip lever and pull hinged skylight downwards.
Turn the lever one quarter turn. The latch (Fig. 62,4) must slide into the
lower aperture (Fig. 62,3).
Locking in the ventilation
position:
Grip lever and pull hinged skylight downwards.
Turn the lever one quarter turn. The latch (Fig. 62,4) must slide into the
upper aperture (Fig. 62,2).
Roman shade The Roman shade may be closed at any position, either with the hinged sky-
light open or closed.
Closing:
Pull out Roman shade (Fig. 63,1) and release in the required position. The
Roman shade will stay in that position.
Opening:
Slowly push the Roman shade at the handle to its initial position.
Insect screen
Closing:
Pull insect screen (Fig. 63,2) out until it engages with the latch on the oppo-
site side.
Opening:
Slightly push up insect screen along the strip. The latch is released.
Slowly return insect screen into its initial position.
Fig. 62 Hinged skylight, lock Fig. 63 Hinged skylight
If it rains and the hinged skylight is in ventilation position, that could lead to
water penetrating the living area. Therefore close hinged skylight com-
pletely.
The insect screen may be damaged if it is closed with the hinged skylight
closed. Therefore only close the insect screen when the hinged skylight is
open.
79Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Living
7
7.6.3 Heki skylight (mini and midi)
The Heki skylight is opened on one side only.
Opening:
Press the safety knob (Fig. 64,2) and pull the bar (Fig. 64,1) down with both
hands.
Pull the bar (Fig. 65,1) in the guides (Fig. 65,2) to the rearmost position
(Fig. 65,3).
Closing:
Use both hands to push the bar (Fig. 65,1) slightly upwards.
Push the bar back in the guides.
Push the bar upwards with both hands until it is above the safety knob
(Fig. 64,2).
Ventilation position The Heki skylight can be put in two ventilation positions: Bad weather position
(Fig. 66,1) and central position (Fig. 66,2). Depending on the model, the sky-
light can be locked in the central position with the latch (Fig. 67,1).
Press the safety knob (Fig. 64,2) and pull the bar (Fig. 64,1) down with both
hands.
Pull the bar in the guides (Fig. 65,2) to the desired position.
Push the bar slightly upwards and into the selected guide (Fig. 66,1 or 2)
and lock if necessary.
Roman shade To close and open the Roman shade:
Closing:
Pull out Roman shade at the handle and release in the required position.
The Roman shade will stay in that position.
Fig. 64 Safety knob on the Heki sky-
light
Fig. 65 Heki skylight, guide
Fig. 66 Heki skylight in ventilation
position
Fig. 67 Ventilation position locking
mechanism
80 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Living
7
Opening: Slowly push the Roman shade at the handle to its initial position.
Insect screen To close and open the insect screen:
Closing:
Pull the insect screen by the handle to the opposite handle of the Roman
shade.
Opening:
Press the rear part of the handle of the insect screen. The latch is released.
Use handle to return the insect screen slowly to its initial position.
7.6.4 Wind-up skylight
The wind-up skylight can be opened using the manual crank.
Opening:
Rotate the hand crank (Fig. 68,2) until a resistance can be felt (max.
opening angle 70°).
Closing:
Rotate the hand crank until the wind-up skylight is closed. The wind-up sky-
light can be locked after rotating two or three more times.
Check the locking mechanism. To do so, press your hand against the
acrylic glass.
Roman shade The Roman shade can be closed in any position, as desired. If the Roman
shade is locked with the insect screen, the insect screen is also moved along
on closing the Roman shade.
Closing:
Pull the handle of the Roman shade (Fig. 68,3) and release in the desired
position. The Roman shade will stay in that position.
Opening:
Slowly push the Roman shade at the handle to its initial position.
Insect screen If the insect screen is locked with the Roman shade, the Roman shade is also
moved along on closing the insect screen.
Closing:
Pull insect screen at the handle (Fig. 68,1) to the opposite handle of the
Roman shade (Fig. 68,3) and allow to engage.
Opening:
Press the handle of the insect screen (Fig. 68,1) at the back upwards and
detach the insect screen from the Roman shade (Fig. 68,3).
Slowly push insect screen at the handle to its initial position.
Fig. 68 Wind-up skylight
81Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Living
7
7.7 Rotating seats
The lever for rotating the seat is located on the front of the seat.
Turning:
Push both armrests at the driver's/front passenger's seat upward.
Push the driver's seat/front passenger's seat backwards or into the central
position.
Pull the lever (Fig. 69,1) to turn the seat. The seat is released from the
locking device.
The seats can be rotated in any direction. The seats can only be locked in posi-
tion in the direction of travel.
7.8 Tables
7.8.1 Suspension table with folding table-top extension
The table surface of the suspension table size can be enlarged by folding out
a table element.
Before commencing the journey, rotate all swivel seats in the direction
of travel and lock in position. During the journey, the swivel seats must
remain locked in place in the direction of travel.
Setting the position of the seats and armrests is described in chapter 5.
Fig. 69 Driver's and front passenger's
seats (SKA)
Fig. 70 Extend suspension table Fig. 71 Suspension table with fold-out
leg
82 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Living
7
Extending: Release the locking lever (Fig. 70,4) underneath the table-top.
Slightly lift the front of the table-top (Fig. 70,3) and pull it to the middle of
the vehicle as far as it will go.
The inserted table-top extension (Fig. 70,8) pivots upwards.
Push the table-tops together until the catch audibly locks into place.
Reducing size:
Release the locking lever (Fig. 70,4) underneath the table-top.
Slightly lift the front of the table-top and pull it out completely.
Push back the table-top. The table-top extension pivots downwards.
Lift up the front of the table-top slightly and push it all the way in.
The suspension table may also be used as a bed foundation.
Conversion to bed
foundation:
Lift the front of the table-top by approx. 45°.
Pull out the lower part of the support leg (Fig. 70,6) down and lay aside.
Press the release knob (Fig. 71,1) on the lock (Fig. 70,2)
Detach the suspension table from the upper attachment rail (Fig. 70,1).
Hook the suspension table into the lower attachment rail (Fig. 70,7) and set
it down onto the floor with the upper part of the support leg (Fig. 70,5).
7.8.2 Fixed table (movable table-top)
The top of the fixed table can be moved both lengthways and crossways.
Moving in a lengthways
direction:
Loosen knurled screw (Fig. 72,1).
Move table-top (Fig. 72,2) to the desired position.
Retighten the knurled screw.
Moving in a crossways
direction:
Loosen knurled screw (Fig. 72,3).
Move table-top (Fig. 72,2) to the desired position.
Retighten the knurled screw.
The fixed table cannot be used as a bed foundation.
7.9 Central locking system for kitchen unit
Depending on the model, the kitchen unit is fitted with a central locking system.
When you start the vehicle engine, the central locking system is activated
automatically.
Fig. 72 Fixed table
83Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Living
7
Unlocking: Push the panel (Fig. 73,1) to the side.
Press the upper part of the switch (Fig. 73,2). The flaps and drawers of the
kitchen unit are unlocked.
Locking manually:
Push the panel (Fig. 73,1) to the side.
Press the lower part of the switch (Fig. 73,2). The flaps and drawers of the
kitchen unit are locked.
7.10 Television
Flat screen in the TV
cabinet
The flat screen is attached to a console in the TV cabinet.
Pulling the television
console forward:
Press the release knob (Fig. 74,5) and pull the holder for the flat screen for-
ward as far as possible by the handle (Fig. 74,4).
Swivelling the television
console:
Pull the release knob (Fig. 74,1) and swivel flat screen (Fig. 74,2) to the
desired position.
Loosen knurled screw (Fig. 74,3).
Set the desired angle for the flat screen and re-tighten the knurled screw.
Fig. 73 Switch for the kitchen unit's
central locking system
1 Panel
2 Switch for the kitchen unit's central
locking system
Before commencing the journey, remove the television from the support
and store it securely.
Before commencing the journey, place and secure the flat screen and
screen support in the initial position. If the screen holder is installed in a
TV cabinet: Close TV cabinet.
Before commencing the journey, ensure that the antenna is in park posi-
tion. Danger of accidents!
Fig. 74 TV cabinet
84 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Living
7
Flat screen with jointed
arm
The flat screen is fastened to a jointed arm.
Positioning the flat screen
with jointed arm:
Pull on the fabric strip (Fig. 75,3) to unlock the jointed arm (Fig. 75,2).
Swivel flat screen (Fig. 75,1) into the required position.
Take hold of the flat screen at the top and bottom edge with both hands and
set the desired angle of inclination.
7.11 Lamps
Spotlight The spotlight can be both swivelled and pushed.
Swivelling the spotlight:
Grasp the housing (Fig. 76,2) and swivel it.
The spotlight can be swivelled in various directions:
To the left and to the right
Up and down
Shifting spotlight:
Grasp the holder (Fig. 76,1).
Push spotlight along the rail system to desired position.
Fig. 75 Flat screen with jointed arm
Bulbs and light fittings can be extremely hot.
Allow the light bulbs and lamp holders to cool down before touching
them.
If the light is switched on or still hot, there must always be a safety dis-
tance of at least 30 cm between stores or curtains and flammable
objects. Fire hazard!
Fig. 76 Spotlight
85Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Living
7
Plug-in light The plug-in lights can be plugged into the sockets provided. The sockets are
distributed throughout the vehicle.
Removing a plug-in light:
Grip the plug-in light at the base (Fig. 77,3).
Push the release knob (Fig. 77,4).
Pull the plug-in light (Fig. 77,1) out of the socket (Fig. 77,5).
Plugging in the plug-in light:
Insert the plug in the base of the plug-in light into the socket (Fig. 78,1) until
it engages audibly. When doing this, pay attention to the position of the
contacts (Fig. 78,2).
Swivelling the plug-in light:
Grip the plug-in light by the "swan neck" (Fig. 77,2) (if present) or by the
housing, and swivel.
7.12 Light switch
The bottom of the entrance area has light switches for the following lamps:
Awning light (Fig. 79,1)
Seating group lighting (Fig. 79,2)
Fig. 77 Socket with plugged-in light Fig. 78 Socket
The light switches have different layouts according to the model. The light
switches are located either directly on the corresponding lamp or next to
the lamp, e.g. in the vicinity of the seating group.
Fig. 79 Light switch, entrance area
86 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Living
7
7.13 Light control
Functions Depending on the model, the vehicle is fitted with a central lighting system.
This lighting system operates and dims single lamps or lamp groups.
Switch The lights are operated via switches which are installed at different places in
the vehicle. The switches each have two, four (Fig. 80) or eight (Fig. 81) but-
tons. Not all functions are available on each switch. The functions of the indi-
vidual switches and buttons are programmed individually, depending on the
configuration. A function is switched on and off via the same button.
7.14 Remote control for awning light, canopy light and
entrance step
The remote control has the following functions:
Switching the awning light on and off (Fig. 82,1)
Switching the canopy light on and off (Fig. 82,2)
Extending the entrance step
Retracting the entrance step
Fig. 80 Light switch with four buttons Fig. 81 Light switch with eight buttons
Fig. 82 Remote control
87Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Living
7
7.15 Extending the seating group
7.15.1 Extending the central seating group
Extend the table (Fig. 83,3) (see section 7.8).
Pull on the handle (Fig. 83,8) and open the flap (Fig. 83,4).
Fold up bench seat extension (Fig. 84,7) and wedge together with the flap
(Fig. 84,4).
Place the back cushions (Fig. 84,1) and the seat cushions (Fig. 84,2) on
the bench seat extension.
Insert the additional cushions (Fig. 84,6) between the seat cushions and
the exterior wall.
Insert the additional cushions (Fig. 84,5) between the back cushions and
the exterior wall.
Fig. 83 Before extending
Fig. 84 After extending
1 Back cushion
2 Seat cushion
3 Table
4Flap
5 Additional cushion
6 Additional cushion
7 Bench seat extension
8 Handle
88 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Living
7
7.15.2 Extending the central seating group with divan
Close driver's cabin partition (see section 7.3).
Pull on the handle (Fig. 85,1) and open the flap (Fig. 85,2).
Fold up bench seat extension (Fig. 86,4) and wedge together with the flap
(Fig. 86,2).
Unlock and pull out the slatted frame (Fig. 86,3).
Place the additional cushion (Fig. 87,5) on the slatted frame and the bench
seat extension.
Place the additional cushion (Fig. 87,6) on the additional cushion
(Fig. 87,5).
7.16 Beds
7.16.1 Overcab bed
Fig. 85 Prior to conversion
Fig. 86 During conversion
Fig. 87 After conversion
1 Handle
2Flap
3 Slatted frame
4 Bench seat extension
5 Additional cushion
6 Additional cushion
The maximum permitted overcab bed load is 200 kg.
Only use the overcab bed, if the safety net is set up.
Never allow small children to remain in the overcab bed without super-
vision.
But in particular with regard to small children less than 6 years of age,
users should ensure that they cannot fall out of the overcab bed.
Use separate children's beds or travel cots suitable for children.
89Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Living
7
Access ladder Always use the access ladder provided as standard to access the overcab
bed.
Safety net The safety net (Fig. 88,3) is stored as standard between the mattress and
slatted frame. Only use the safety net if persons are already in the alcove.
Setting up:
Fasten the retaining straps (Fig. 88,1) to the holders on the ceiling
(Fig. 88,2).
Folding mechanism The overcab bed can be folded up. This simplifies passage from driver's cabin
to living area.
Folding upwards:
Open driver's cabin partition (see section 7.3).
Lift the mattress forwards and set it down on the panel.
Fold the front of the overcab bed (Fig. 89,1) upwards. The overcab bed is
kept in the upper position by gas-pressure springs.
Folding downwards:
Pull overcab bed downwards.
If necessary, push the mattress behind the panel.
7.16.2 Pull-down bed, electronically lowerable
Do not load the overcab bed without mattress. The plastic mould part can
break!
Fig. 88 Overcab bed
Fig. 89 Overcab bed, folded upwards
The maximum permitted pull-down bed load is 200 kg.
The pull-down bed is not to be used for the storage of luggage.
Only use the pull-down bed, if the safety net is set up.
90 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Living
7
Preparing the driver's
cabin
The rests of the driver's and front passenger's seats must be tipped forwards
before the pull-down bed is lowered.
Turn the driver's and the front passenger's seat to the direction of travel,
lock it in place and move them backwards.
Tip the backrest forwards.
Close the shade in the driver's cabin.
Lowering the pull-down bed:
Press the rocker switch (Fig. 90,1) above the divan, and keep it pressed
until the bed is completely lowered.
Moving the pull-down bed
upwards:
Switch off the reading lamps in the pull-down bed.
Press the rocker switch (Fig. 90,2) above the divan, and keep it pressed
until the bed is completely raised.
Access ladder Always use the access ladder provided as standard to access the pull-down
bed.
Safety net The safety net is stored as standard between the mattress and slatted frame.
Only use the safety net if persons are already in the pull-down bed.
Never allow small children to remain in the pull-down bed without super-
vision.
But in particular with regard to small children less than 6 years of age,
users should ensure that they cannot fall out of the pull-down bed.
Use separate children's beds or travel cots suitable for children.
Switch off the reading lamps in the pull-down bed before the bed is
pushed up. Fire hazard!
Depending on the seat model, the backrest is under strong spring ten-
sion. If there is no resistance to the backrest in these seats, it quickly
moves forward after unlocking.
Do not reach into the area between the bed and the side wall when low-
ering or raising. Danger of bruises!
Only lower or raise the bed when the space between the bed and the
side wall is clear.
Only lower the bed if the area under the bed is clear.
Fig. 90 Switch for pull-down bed
91Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Living
7
7.16.3 Fixed bed (gas-pressure springs)
A storage compartment is underneath the bed. Lift up the slatted frame to
place items in the storage compartment or to empty it from the inside of the
vehicle.
Opening:
Lift the mattress forwards and set it down on the panel.
Lift slatted frame. The gas-pressure springs (Fig. 91,1) hold the slatted
frame open.
Closing:
Press the slatted frame downwards against the resistance of the gas-pres-
sure springs.
If necessary, push the mattress behind the panel.
Fig. 91 Fixed bed
92 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Living
7
7.17 Converting seating groups for sleeping
7.17.1 Central seating group
Convert the table (Fig. 92,3) to a bed foundation (see section 7.8).
Pull the seat cushions (Fig. 94,2) into the centre.
Place the back cushion (Fig. 94,1) between the seat cushion and the wall.
Insert the additional cushion (Fig. 94,5) between the seat cushion and the
wall.
Fig. 92 Prior to conversion
Fig. 93 During conversion
Fig. 94 After conversion
1 Back cushion
2 Seat cushion
3Table
4 Mounting rail
5 Additional cushion
93Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Living
7
7.17.2 Central seating group with extension
Convert the table (Fig. 95,3) to a bed foundation (see section 7.8).
Pull on the handle (Fig. 95,6) and open the flap (Fig. 95,5).
Fold up the bench seat extension (Fig. 96,7) and wedge it with the flap.
Pull the seat cushions (Fig. 97,2) forwards onto the table.
Place the back cushion (Fig. 97,1) between the seat cushion and the wall.
Insert the additional cushion (Fig. 97,8) between the seat cushion and the
wall.
Insert the additional cushions (Fig. 97,9) between the cushions and the
wall.
Insert the additional cushions (Fig. 97,10) between the cushions and the
wall.
Fig. 95 Prior to conversion
Fig. 96 During conversion
Fig. 97 After conversion
1 Back cushion
2 Seat cushion
3Table
4 Mounting rail
5Flap
6 Handle
7 Bench seat extension
8 Additional cushion
9 Additional cushion
10 Additional cushion
94 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Living
7
7.17.3 Central seating group with divan
Extend the table and convert it into a bed foundation (see section 7.8).
Convert the central seating group for sleeping (see section 7.17.2).
Remove the back cushion (Fig. 99,1) and lay it aside.
Pull out the slatted frame (Fig. 99,3).
Pull the seat cushion (Fig. 100,2) to the central seating group.
Insert the additional cushion (Fig. 100,4) between the seat cushion and the
exterior wall.
Fig. 98 Prior to conversion
Fig. 99 During conversion
Fig. 100 After conversion
1 Back cushion
2 Seat cushion
3 Slatted frame
4 Additional cushion
95Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Gas system
8
8Gas system
Chapter overview
This chapter contains instructions regarding the gas system of the vehicle.
The instructions address the following topics:
safety
gas consumption
changing the gas bottles
gas isolator taps
hose break guard
external gas connection
automatic switching facility
The operation of the gas operation appliances of the vehicle is described in
chapter 10.
8.1 General
Before commencing the journey, when leaving the vehicle or when gas
equipment is not in use, close all gas isolator taps and the main isolator
tap on the gas bottle.
No appliance operated by a naked flame (e.g. heater or refrigerator) may
be in operation when filling the tank, on ferries or in the garage. Danger
of explosion!
Do not use appliances operated with a naked flame in closed spaces
(e.g. garages). Danger of poisoning and suffocation!
Only have the gas system maintained, repaired or altered by an author-
ised specialist workshop.
Have the gas system checked by an authorised specialist workshop
according to the national regulations before commissioning. This also
applies for not registered vehicles. For modifications to the gas system
have the gas system immediately checked by an authorised specialist
workshop.
The gas pressure regulator and exhaust gas pipes must also be
inspected. The gas pressure regulator has to be replaced after 10 years
at the latest. The vehicle owner is responsible for seeing that this is car-
ried out.
In case of a defect of the gas system (gas odour, high gas consumption)
there is danger of explosion! Close regulator tap on the gas bottle imme-
diately. Open doors and windows and ventilate well.
If the gas system is defective: Do not smoke; do not ignite any open
flames, and do not operate electric switches (light switches etc.).
Before using the cooker make sure that there is sufficient ventilation.
Open windows or the skylight.
Do not use the gas cooker or gas oven for heating purposes.
If there are several gas devices, each gas device must have its own gas
isolator tap. If individual gas devices are not in use, close the respective
gas isolator tap.
Ignition safety valves must close within 1 minute after the gas flame has
extinguished. A clicking sound is audible. Check function from time to
time.
96 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Gas system
8
8.2 Gas bottles
The built-in gas devices are exclusively meant for use with propane or
butane gas or a mixture of both. The gas pressure regulator as well as
all built-in gas devices are designed for a gas pressure of 30 mbar.
Propane gas is capable of gasification up to -42 °C, whereas butane gas
gasifies at 0 °C. Below these temperatures no gas pressure is available.
Butane gas is unsuitable for use in winter.
Regularly inspect the gas tube fitted to the gas bottle connection for
tightness. The gas tube must not have any tears and must not be
porous. Have the gas tube replaced by an authorised specialist work-
shop no later than ten years after the manufacturing date. The operator
of the gas system must see to it that the parts are replaced.
Due to its function and construction, the gas bottle compartment is a
space which is open to the exterior. Never cover or block up the standard
forced ventilations. Otherwise gas that is emitted can not be diverted to
the outside.
Do not use the gas bottle compartment as storage space as it is not
moisture-proof.
Secure the gas bottle compartment against unauthorised access. To do
this, lock the compartment.
The regulator tap on the gas bottle must be accessible.
Only connect gas-operated devices (e.g. gas grill) which have been
designed for a gas pressure of 30 mbar.
The exhaust gas pipe must be fitted tightly to the heating system and to
the vent and must be sealed. The exhaust gas pipe must not show any
evidence of damage.
Exhaust fumes must be able to escape into the atmosphere unhindered
and fresh air must be able to enter unhindered. For this reason, keep the
exhaust pipe and intake openings clean and unobstructed (e.g. free from
snow and ice). For this reason, no snow walls or aprons may lie against
the vehicle.
Gas bottles are only to be transported within the designated gas bottle
compartment.
Place the gas bottles in vertical position in the gas bottle compartment.
Fasten the gas bottles so that they are unable to turn or tilt.
If the gas bottles are not connected to the gas tube, always place the
protective cap on top.
Close the regulator tap on the gas bottle before the gas pressure regu-
lator or gas tube are removed from the gas bottle.
The gas pressure regulator or the gas tube must only be secured with a
suitable gas spanner (Do not overtighten).
Only use special gas pressure regulators with a safety valve designed
for vehicle use. Other gas pressure regulators are not permitted and
cannot meet the demanding requirements.
Use the gas pressure regulator defroster if the temperature falls below
5°C.
97Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Gas system
8
8.3 Gas consumption
8.4 Changing gas bottles
Open external gas bottle compartment (see section 7.2).
Fold guard plate (Fig. 101,3) down.
Set handle (Fig. 101,2) into a horizontal position.
Use only 11 kg or 5 kg gas bottles. Camping gas bottles with built-in
check valve (blue bottle with max. 2.5 or 3 kg content) are can be used
in exceptional cases with a safety valve.
Use the shortest possible tube lengths (150 cm max.) for external gas
bottles.
Never block the floor ventilation openings below the gas bottles.
For gas-operated units the gas pressure must be reduced to 30 mbar.
Connect gas pressure regulator complete with safety valve directly to bottle
valve.
The gas pressure regulator reduces the gas pressure in the gas bottle
down to the operating pressure of the gas devices.
For filling and connecting the gas bottles in Europe the accessories shops
have corresponding Euro filling sets and Euro bottle sets.
Information available at the dealers or service centre.
For information on the gas supply in Europe see chapter 17.
The data about gas consumption of the individual gas devices is standard
average values.
Appliances Gas consumption in grams/hour
Cooker, per cooker Approx. 140 - 165 g/h
Refrigerator Approx. 18 g/h
When changing gas bottles, do not smoke or create any open fire.
When you have changed the gas bottle, check whether gas escapes at
the connection points and unions. Use a leakage search spray to spray
the relevant connection point or union. These agents are available at the
accessories shop.
Fig. 101 Gas bottle compartment Fig. 102 Gas bottle connection
98 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Gas system
8
Pull out the slide (Fig. 101,1) as far as possible.
Close the regulator tap (Fig. 102,4) on the gas bottle. Pay attention to the
direction of the arrow.
Unscrew the gas pressure regulator (Fig. 102,2) from the gas bottle at the
hexagon nut (Fig. 102,3).
Remove the gas pressure regulator and the gas tube (Fig. 102,1) from the
gas bottle.
Release the fixing belts and remove the gas bottle.
Place a filled gas bottle in the gas bottle compartment.
Fix gas bottle in place with the fixing belts.
Position the gas pressure regulator (Fig. 102,2) and the gas tube
(Fig. 102,1) on the gas bottle and screw in tightly to the gas bottle at the
hexagonal nut (Fig. 102,3).
Push in the slide (Fig. 101,1) as far as possible, and set the handle
(Fig. 101,2) in a vertical position.
Fold guard plate (Fig. 101,3) up.
Close the external flap (see section 7.2).
8.5 Gas isolator taps
A gas isolator tap (Fig. 103) for every gas device is built into the vehicle.
The gas isolator taps are located under the cooker or in the vicinity of the gas
devices (e.g. in the bench seat).
8.6 Hose break guard (crash protection unit)
The crash protection unit protects against unwanted gas discharge. In the
event of an accident or a too high angle of the vehicle the gas supply will auto-
matically be interrupted.
Construction of the unit The crash protection unit consists of a control unit, an electrical valve and the
operating unit with a tricoloured LED.
Fig. 103 Symbols for the gas isolator
taps
1 Refrigerator
2Cooker
3 Heater/boiler
4Oven
When the vehicle is equipped with the crash protection unit the living area
heater may be operated during the journey.
Also read the manufacturer's instruction manual.
99Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Gas system
8
Only the electrical functions can be switched at the operating unit (Fig. 104).
The regulator taps on the gas bottles must be opened manually.
The indicator lamp on the operating unit shows the condition of the gas
system. The system is okay when the indicator lamp (Fig. 104,1) lights up
green. When the indicator lamp lights up or flashes red a fault has occurred.
The gas supply is interrupted.
Putting into operation:
Open regulator taps on the gas bottles.
Switch on the system at the operating unit (Fig. 104).
For this, set the rocker switch (Fig. 104,2) to "I". The indicator lamp
(Fig. 104,1) flashes yellow (system test) and lights up green.
Switching off:
Set the rocker switch (Fig. 104,2) to "O". The indicator lamp (Fig. 104,1)
goes out.
Close regulator taps on the gas bottles.
8.7 External gas connection
Fig. 104 Operating unit
If the external gas connection is not in use, always close the gas isolator
tap.
Only gas appliances with a suitable adapter should be connected to the
external gas connection.
Connect only external gas appliances which are designed for an opera-
tion pressure of 30 mbar.
Once you have made the connection and opened the gas isolator tap,
make sure that no gas is escaping at the connection point. If there is a
leak in the external gas connection, gas will escape into the open air.
Immediately close the gas isolator tap and the regulator tap on the gas
bottle. Have the external gas connection checked by an authorised spe-
cialist workshop.
When connecting an external gas appliance, make sure that there is
nothing near the external gas connection that could cause a spark.
Do not use the external gas connection to fill gas bottles. Observe the
information stickers on the external gas connection.
100 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Gas system
8
The external gas connection (Fig. 105) is located at the rear or to the left or
right of the vehicle depending on the model.
Connect the external gas device to the connection point (Fig. 105,1).
Open the gas isolator tap (Fig. 105,2).
8.8 Duomatic switching facility
The Duomatic is an automatic switching facility with a remote display for a two-
bottle gas system. The Duomatic switching facility automatically switches gas
supply from the primary bottle to the reserve bottle as soon as the primary
bottle is either empty or no longer ready for operation. The gas appliances may
still continue operation. The Duomatic switching facility is suitable for all com-
mercial gas bottles from 3 kg to 33 kg.
Construction of the unit The Duomatic switching facility consists of a central regulator (Fig. 106,3) and
a switching regulator (Fig. 106,5). The knob (Fig. 106,6) on the switching reg-
ulator is used to select which of the gas bottles is to be used as a primary bottle
and which is to be used as a reserve bottle.
Fig. 105 External gas connection, gas
isolator tap closed
Do not use the switching facility in closed spaces.
If the vehicle is equipped with a panel of the DT series and the switching
facility is operated via this panel, the operating unit is redundant.
Further information can be obtained in the device manufacturer's instruc-
tion manual.
Fig. 106 Duomatic switching facility Fig. 107 Operating unit
101Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Gas system
8
Both regulators are equipped with a pressure controller and the regulator
defroster Eis-Ex. This prevents damage to the gas system during the winter
months.
The pressure gauge (Fig. 106,2) on the central regulator indicates the pres-
sure in the gas bottle, not the filling level of the gas bottle. The pressure gauge
can be used to test the impermeability of the gas bottle.
Only the electrical functions can be switched at the operating unit (Fig. 107).
The regulator taps on the gas bottles (Fig. 106,1 and 4) must be opened man-
ually.
The central regulator provides a constant gas pressure, regardless of which
gas bottle is being drawn upon. The two indicator lamps on the operating unit
show which gas bottle can be used to provide gas. When both indicator lamps
are illuminated, the position of the knob on the switching regulator indicates
which gas bottle is currently being drawn upon.
Operating modes The Duomatic switching facility has two operating modes:
Winter operation "On and heating"
Summer operation "On"
Putting into operation:
Open the regulator taps on the gas bottles (Fig. 106,1 and 4).
Use the knob (Fig. 106,6) on the switching regulator (Fig. 106,5) to select
the gas bottle which is to be the primary source of gas (primary bottle).
Always turn the knob as far as it will go.
When the knob is in the red area, the gas is taken primarily from the gas
bottle with the central regulator (Fig. 106,3).
When the knob is in the green area, the gas is taken primarily from the gas
bottle with the switching regulator (Fig. 106,5).
Switch on the Duomatic switching facility at the operating unit (Fig. 107).
To do so, set the rocker switch (Fig. 107,2) to winter operation "On and
heating" (Fig. 107,4) or to summer operation "On" (Fig. 107,6). Both gas
pressure regulators are now ventilated. The operating indicator
(Fig. 107,3) lights up.
Switching off:
Set the rocker switch (Fig. 107,2) to " " (Fig. 107,5). The operating indi-
cator (Fig. 107,3) goes out.
Close the regulator taps on the gas bottles (Fig. 106,1 and 4).
Remote display The indicator lamps on the operating unit (Fig. 107) indicate in the vehicle inte-
rior whether the gas bottles are ready for operation.
Indicator lamp "A" (Fig. 107,1): Gas bottle on the central regulator
Indicator lamp "B" (Fig. 107,7): Gas bottle on the switching regulator
Changing gas bottles If an indicator lamp goes out during operation, this signifies that the corre-
sponding gas bottle is empty and must be replaced. The reserve bottle con-
tinues supplying the gas appliances with gas.
When operating with only one gas bottle (e.g. during the summer) connect
the central regulator to this bottle. Position the knob on the switching regu-
lator in the red area.
When changing gas bottles, do not smoke or create any open fire.
102 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Gas system
8
Changing gas bottles: Close the regulator tap on the empty gas bottle.
Unscrew the regulator of the gas bottle.
Connect the full gas bottle to the regulator.
Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle.
Set the knob on the switching regulator with a half-turn, so that the newly
replaced gas bottle will serve as a reserve bottle.
8.9 DuoControl switching facility
The DuoControl is an automatic switching facility with a remote display for a
two-bottle gas system. The DuoControl switching facility automatically
switches gas supply from the primary bottle to the reserve bottle as soon as
the primary bottle is either empty or no longer ready for operation. The gas
appliances may still continue operation. The DuoControl switching facility is
suitable for all commercial gas bottles from 3 kg to 33 kg.
Construction of the unit The DuoControl switching facility consists of a reversing valve (Fig. 108,3) and
an operating unit (Fig. 109). The reversing valve is installed between the gas
tubes (Fig. 108,2 and 5). The knob (Fig. 108,4) on the reversing valve is used
to select which of the gas bottles is to be used as a primary bottle and which
is to be used as a reserve bottle.
The reversing valve is equipped with the regulator defroster Eis-Ex. This pre-
vents damage to the gas system during the winter months.
Only the electrical functions can be switched at the operating unit (Fig. 109).
The regulator taps on the gas bottles (Fig. 108,1 and 6) must be opened man-
ually.
The reversing valve provides a constant gas pressure, regardless of which gas
bottle is being drawn upon. The two indicator lamps on the operating unit indi-
cate the level of the primary bottle. When the green indicator lamp (Fig. 109,6)
Always mount the regulator in such a way that the protective cap faces
upwards.
Do not use the switching facility in closed spaces.
If the vehicle is equipped with a panel of the DT series and the switching
facility is operated via this panel, the operating unit is redundant.
Also read the manufacturer's instruction manual.
Fig. 108 DuoControl switching facility Fig. 109 Operating unit
103Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Gas system
8
illuminates, the primary bottle is full. When the red indicator lamp (Fig. 109,5)
illuminates, the primary bottle is empty. In this case, the reserve bottle is used
for the gas supply.
Operating modes The DuoControl switching facility has two operating modes:
Winter operation "On and heating"
Summer operation "On"
Putting into operation:
Open the regulator taps on the gas bottles (Fig. 108,1 and 6).
Use the knob (Fig. 108,4) on the reversing valve (Fig. 108,3) to select the
gas bottle which is to be the primary source of gas (primary bottle).
Always turn the knob as far as it will go.
Switch on the DuoControl switching facility at the operating unit (Fig. 109).
To do so, set the rocker switch (Fig. 109,7) to winter operation "On and
heating" (Fig. 109,2) or to summer operation "On" (Fig. 109,4). The
reversing valve is now deaerated. The yellow indicator lamp (Fig. 109,1)
illuminates if the winter operation has been selected and the regulator
defroster is activated.
Switching off:
Set the rocker switch (Fig. 109,7) to " " (Fig. 109,3). The yellow indicator
lamp (Fig. 109,1) goes out.
Close the regulator taps on the gas bottles (Fig. 108,1 and 6).
Remote display The indicator lamps on the operating unit (Fig. 109,5 and 6) indicate in the
vehicle interior whether the primary bottle is ready for operation.
Changing gas bottles If the green indicator lamp (Fig. 109,6) stops illuminating during operation and
the red indicator lamp (Fig. 109,5) illuminates, the gas bottle selected as pri-
mary bottle is empty and needs to be changed. The reserve bottle continues
supplying the gas appliances with gas.
Changing gas bottles:
Close the regulator tap on the empty gas bottle.
Unscrew the gas tube of the gas bottle.
Connect the full gas bottle to the gas tube.
Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle.
Set the knob on the reversing valve with a half-turn, so that the newly
replaced gas bottle will serve as a reserve bottle.
When changing gas bottles, do not smoke or create any open fire.
104 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Gas system
8
105Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Electrical system
9
9Electrical system
Chapter overview
This chapter contains instructions regarding the electrical system of the
vehicle.
The instructions address the following topics:
safety
explanations of terms relating to the battery
12 V power supply
living area battery
loading the batteries
AC converter
auxiliary charging unit
transformer/rectifier
panel
240 V power supply
connection to the 240 V power supply
fuse rating
The operation of the electrical appliances of the housing body is described in
chapter 10.
9.1 General safety instructions
The vehicle is a safe place during a storm (Faraday cage). However, to protect
the electrical devices, disconnect the 240 V connection and retract the
antennae as a precaution.
9.2 Terms
Off-load voltage The off-load voltage is the voltage of the battery in idle condition, i. e. no cur-
rent is consumed and the battery is not being charged.
Closed circuit current Some electrical appliances, such as the clock and the indicator lamps, require
continuous electric current, for this reason they are referred to as inactive
appliances. This closed circuit current flows even if the 12 V power supply has
been switched off.
Total discharge Total discharge of the battery is imminent, if a battery is completely discharged
by an active appliance and by closed circuit current.
Only allow qualified personnel to work on the electrical system.
All electronic devices (e.g. mobile telephones, radios, televisions or DVD
players) which have been retrofitted to the vehicle and are operated
during the journey must have certain features: These are the CE certifi-
cation, the EMC inspection (electromagnetic compatibility) and the "E1"
inspection.
Only in this way can the functional reliability of the vehicle be ensured.
Otherwise the airbag may be triggered or interference to the on-board
electronics may result.
Total discharge damages the battery.
106 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Electrical system
9
Capacity Capacity refers to the amount of electricity which can be stored in a battery.
The capacity of a battery is given in ampere hours (Ah). If a battery possesses
a capacity of 80 Ah, then the battery can dispense a current of 1 A for 80 hours
or a current of 2 A for 40 hours.
External influences such as temperature may alter the storage capacity of the
battery.
9.3 12 V power supply
When the vehicle is not connected to the 240 V power supply or the 240 V
power supply is switched off, the living area battery supplies the living area
with 12 V DC. The living area battery has a limited power supply only. For this
reason, electrical appliances such as the radio and the lights should not be
operated for a long time without using the 240 V power supply.
When the vehicle engine is running, the vehicle alternator recharges the living
area battery and the starter battery.
The 12 V power supply can be cut off with the 12 V main switch on the panel.
Depending on the model, the heater, basic light/entrance step and reserve 4
or only the electrical entrance step remain on standby. The refrigerator is then
only operated with 12 V if the vehicle engine is running. This helps to prevent
the living area battery from being run down too quickly.
9.3.1 Living area battery
To disconnect all electrical 12 V appliances from the power supply, discon-
nect the living area battery from the 12 V power supply via the panel.
Prior to commencing a journey ensure the living area battery is fully
charged. For this reason charge the living area battery for at least 20 hours
before commencing the journey.
During the trip, use every opportunity to charge the living area battery.
Charge the living area battery for at least 20 hours after the journey.
Charge the battery for at least 20 hours before laying up.
Use the charger module provided on the transformer/rectifier to charge the
living area battery. When charging externally, use a regulated charger that
is suitable for the battery type and the capacity of the living area battery.
For long periods of inactivity (4 weeks or more), either disconnect the living
area battery from the 12 V power supply via the panel or recharge it regu-
larly.
When the living area battery is changed, only use batteries of the same
type.
When changing the living area battery, use only batteries which meet the
minimum capacity of the charger. Observe the separate instruction manual
for the charger. Lower-capacity batteries will generate a great deal of heat
when they are charged. Danger of explosion!
Before disconnecting or connecting the terminals of the battery, switch off
the vehicle engine as well as the 240 V and 12 V power supplies and all
appliances. Danger of short circuit!
If the starter battery or living area battery are disconnected, do not apply
the ignition. Danger of short circuit!
Appliances with a maximum of 10 A can be connected to the sockets of the
12 V power supply system.
107Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Electrical system
9
Position The living area battery is installed in the double floor and can be accessed via
an external flap on the right of the vehicle.
Discharging The living area battery is discharged by the closed circuit current which some
electrical appliances continuously require.
The self-discharge rate of the battery is dependant on temperature. At 20 to
25 °C the self-discharge rate is approx. 3 % of the capacity per month. The
self-discharge rate will increase with rising temperatures: At 35 °C the self-dis-
charge rate is approx. 20 % of the capacity per month.
During periods of low external temperatures, the battery will lose part of its
capacity.
An older battery no longer has the complete capacity available.
The higher the number of active electrical appliances, the faster the energy of
the living area battery is consumed.
9.4 Charging the living area battery and starter battery
The battery is maintenance-free. Maintenance-free means:
It is not necessary to check the acid level.
It is not necessary to lubricate the battery poles.
It is not necessary to refill the distilled water.
Even a maintenance-free battery must be charged regularly.
Total discharge damages the battery.
Recharge battery in good time.
Appliances such as the safety/drainage valve, charger, solar charge regu-
lator and panel consume approx. 20 mA to 65 mA of electricity from the
battery capacity, even when the 12 V main switch is turned off. Therefore
disconnect the living area battery from the 12 V power supply via the panel,
if the vehicle will not be used for a long period of time.
The acid in the battery is poisonous and corrosive. Any contact with the
skin or the eyes is to be avoided.
In the case of charging with an external charger there is danger of explo-
sion. Only charge the battery in a well ventilated area and away from
naked flames or possible sources of sparks.
Always remove the living area battery or the starter battery from the
vehicle when charging them using an external charger.
Do not connect the battery cables to the wrong poles.
If the starter battery or living area battery are disconnected, do not apply
the ignition. Danger of short circuit!
Before disconnecting or connecting the terminals of the battery, switch off
the vehicle engine as well as the 240 V and 12 V power supplies and all
appliances. Danger of short circuit!
Before charging the battery, check whether the external charger is
approved for the battery type.
Observe the instruction manuals for the base vehicle and the charger.
Irreparable damage to the living area battery will result if it is overcharged.
108 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Electrical system
9
The starter battery can only be fully charged with an external charger. If a
240 V power supply is used, the transformer/rectifier charges the starter bat-
tery with a float charge only. Even in mobile operation, the vehicle engine alter-
nator is not capable of completely charging the starter battery.
9.4.1 Charging using a 240 V power supply
If the vehicle is connected to the 240 V power supply, the living area battery
and the starter battery are automatically charged by the charger module on the
transformer/rectifier. The starter battery is only charged with a float charge.
The charging current is adapted to suit the charging condition of the battery.
This ensures that it is not possible to overload the battery.
To make use of the maximum output from the charger module on the trans-
former/rectifier, switch off all electrical appliances during charging.
9.4.2 Charging using the vehicle engine
When the vehicle engine is running, the vehicle alternator recharges the living
area battery and the starter battery. When the vehicle engine is switched off,
the batteries are automatically disconnected from one another by a relay in the
transformer/rectifier. This prevents the starter battery from being run down by
electrical appliances in the living area. The starting capability of the vehicle is
thus preserved. The charging condition of the living area battery or the starter
battery can be read on the panel.
9.4.3 Charging with an external charger
When charging the living area battery and the starter battery with an external
charger, proceed as follows:
Turn off the vehicle engine.
Switch off 12 V main switch on the panel. The indicator lamp will go off.
Disconnect the living area battery from the 12 V power supply.
Disconnect the mains plug from the transformer/rectifier.
Switch off all gas appliances, all gas isolator taps and close the regulator
tap on the gas bottle.
There is a danger of short circuit when disconnecting the battery poles. For
this reason, first disconnect the negative terminal on the living area battery
or the starter battery and then the positive.
Remove the living area battery or the starter battery from the vehicle.
Check that the external charger is turned off.
Connect the external charger to the living area battery or the starter battery.
Pay attention to the polarity: First connect the positive terminal "+" to the
positive pole of the battery, then connect the negative terminal "–" to the
negative pole of the battery.
Switch on the external charger.
See the instructions for use of the connected charger for information con-
cerning charge period required for the battery.
See the specifications on the battery for information concerning its
strength.
Disconnect the external charger in reverse order.
109Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Electrical system
9
9.5 AC converter
Some models have a converter installed in the vehicle.
The AC converter supplies the 240 V sockets with voltage. When the vehicle
is not connected to the 240 V supply, the connected battery supplies the
voltage.
The battery has a limited power supply only. For this reason, the electrical
appliances should not be operated for a long time without using the 240 V
power supply.
The converter can be switched to two operating modes with the main switch
(Fig. 110,1):
I "On" = unit permanently switched on.
II "Remo." = unit can be switched on and off at the external switch
(Fig. 111,1).
The LEDs show the operating mode "Power Status" (Fig. 110,2), the load
range "Load Level" (Fig. 110,3) and the voltage range "Input Level"
(Fig. 110,4).
Do not cover the ventilation slots. Danger of overheating!
Also read the manufacturer's instruction manual.
Fig. 110 Displays and operating con-
trols
Fig. 111 External switch
110 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Electrical system
9
9.6 Auxiliary charging unit
The auxiliary charging unit (Fig. 112) supports the transformer/rectifier's
charging performance. Therefore, do not switch off the auxiliary charging unit.
Position The auxiliary charging unit is fitted next to the transformer/rectifier.
9.7 Transformer/rectifier (EBL 220)
Do not cover the ventilation slots. Danger of overheating!
Fig. 112 Auxiliary charging unit
1 Mains switch (on rear side of unit)
2 Battery selector switch (lead acid/dry-
fill option)
3Fuse
Do not cover the ventilation slots. Danger of overheating!
Depending on the model, not all slots for the fuses are occupied.
Further information can be obtained in the device manufacturer's instruc-
tion manual.
111Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Electrical system
9
Functions The transformer/rectifier has the following functions:
The transformer/rectifier charges the living area battery. The transformer/
rectifier charges the starter battery with a float charge only.
The transformer/rectifier monitors the voltage in the living area battery.
The transformer/rectifier distributes the current to the 12 V circuits and
secures them. Devices with a maximum of 10 A can be connected to the
sockets.
The transformer/rectifier contains connections for a solar charge regulator,
an auxiliary charging unit as well as other control and monitoring functions.
When the engine is turned off, the transformer/rectifier separates the
starter battery electrically from the living area battery. This prevents the
12 V living area appliances from discharging the starter battery.
The transformer/rectifier only works in conjunction with a panel.
When the transformer/rectifier is subject to a heavy load, the fitted charger
module reduces the charging current. This protects the charger from over-
heating. The transformer/rectifier is subject to a heavy load when e.g. an
empty living area battery is being charged, additional electrical appliances are
turned on and the ambient temperatures are high.
Position The transformer/rectifier (Fig. 113) is installed in the double floor. It can be
accessed via floor flap in the entrance area.
Fig. 113 Transformer/rectifier (EBL 220)
1 Connections BL 2 - auxiliary charging unit 1
2 Connections BL 1 - auxiliary charging unit 2
3Flat fuses
4 Connections BL 9 - solar charge regulator
5 Mains connection 240 V
6 Connections BL 10 - panel
7 Battery selector switch, lead acid/dryfill option
8 Connections BL 13 - panel
9 Connections BL 12 - sensor for living area battery D+
10 Connections BL 11 - panel
11 Connections BL 8 - entrance step, TV, antenna
12 Connections BL 6 - heater, water pump, spare
13 Connections BL 7 - awning, tank heater, awning light
14 Selector switch for the number of auxiliary charging units
15 Connections BL 5 - solar charge regulator
16 Connections BL 4 - refrigerator from starter battery
17 Connections BL 3 - refrigerator
112 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Electrical system
9
9.7.1 Battery separation
The battery separation disconnects all the living area 12 V appliances, even
the safety/drainage valve. This prevents the living area battery from slowly dis-
charging if the vehicle is not used for a longer period of time (e.g. temporary
lay-up).
The batteries can still be charged by the transformer/rectifier when the battery
separation is activated.
Activating/deactivating See section 9.8.2.
9.7.2 Battery selector switch
The battery selector switch is used to set the charger module in the trans-
former/rectifier to the type of living area battery installed in the vehicle ("lead
acid" or "dryfill" battery).
9.7.3 Battery monitor
The battery monitor in the transformer/rectifier monitors the voltage in the
living area battery.
If the battery voltage falls below 10.5 V, the battery monitor in the transformer/
rectifier switches off all of the 12 V appliances, excluding the safety/drainage
valve.
A refrigerator with automatic power selection system switches to gas opera-
tion.
The safety/drainage valve will open after the activation of the battery sep-
aration. The water flows out of the boiler. When the battery separation is
deactivated again, close the safety/drainage valve of the boiler by hand.
Also switch off a refrigerator with automatic power selection system. The
refrigerator will otherwise switch to gas operation.
After deactivation of the battery separation, it may be necessary to reset
the date and time. The remaining settings will be saved at the activation of
the battery separation and will be maintained.
If the battery selector switch is set incorrectly, there is the danger of the
formation of detonating (oxy-hydrogen gas). Danger of explosion!
Incorrect setting of the battery selector switch damages the living area bat-
tery.
The factory settings of the battery selector switch must not be changed.
You must fully recharge a discharged living area battery as soon as pos-
sible.
113Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Electrical system
9
Measures: Switch off all electrical appliances that are not absolutely essential at the
corresponding switch.
If necessary, use the 12 V main switch to switch the 12 V power supply
back on for a short while. This is only possible, however, when the battery
voltage is above 11 V. If the voltage is below this level, the 12 V power
supply cannot be switched on again until the living area battery has been
recharged.
9.7.4 Charging the battery
When the vehicle engine is running, the vehicle alternator recharges the living
area battery and the starter battery. When the vehicle engine is switched off,
the batteries are automatically disconnected from one another by a relay in the
transformer/rectifier. This prevents the starter battery from being run down by
electrical appliances in the living area. The starting capability of the vehicle is
thus preserved. The charging condition of the living area battery or the starter
battery can be read on the panel.
If the vehicle is connected to the 240 V power supply, the living area battery
and the starter battery are automatically charged by the charger module on the
transformer/rectifier. The starter battery is only charged with a float charge.
The charging current is adapted to suit the charging condition of the battery.
This ensures that it is not possible to overload the battery.
To make use of the maximum output from the charger module on the trans-
former/rectifier, switch off all electrical appliances during charging.
9.8 Panel MP 20-T
The luminance of the LEDs and the symbols adapts automatically to the
ambient light.
The displays can only be called up if the 12 V power supply is switched on.
As soon as a button is pressed, the gauge is automatically illuminated. The
display goes out 20 seconds after the last key has been pressed.
Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction
manual.
114 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Electrical system
9
9.8.1 240 V indicator lamp
The 240 V indicator lamp (Fig. 114,1) illuminates whenever line voltage is
available at the transformer/rectifier input.
9.8.2 12 V main switch
The 12 V main switch (Fig. 114,18) switches the panel and the 12 V power
supply of the living area on and off.
Exception: Heater, safety/drainage valve, basic light (lighting in the entrance
area) and entrance step remain operational.
Switching on:
Briefly press the "12 V" button (Fig. 114,18). The 12 V living area power
supply is switched on. The "12 V" indicator lights up.
Switching off:
Briefly press the "12 V" button (Fig. 114,18). The 12 V living area power
supply is switched off. The "12 V" indicator goes out.
Fig. 114 Panel MP 20-T
1 230 V indicator lamp
2 Volt symbol
3 Ampere symbol
4 Interior temperature button
5 Digital display
6 External temperature button
7 Water tank symbol
8 Waste water tank symbol
9 Clock gauge
10 Lock
11 Reserve button
12 Tanks gauge
13 Tanks button
14 Living area battery button
15 Starter battery button
16 Symbol for starter battery and living area battery
17 Batteries gauge
18 Button for 12 V power supply (12 V main switch)
If, after switching on, the "11.0" LED of the volt indicator and the "V" volt
symbol (Fig. 114,2) in the batteries gauge (Fig. 114,17) flash, the voltage
of the living area battery is too low. Charge battery.
If, after switching on, the "12 V" indicator, the symbol for the living area bat-
tery (Fig. 114,16) and the "V" volt symbol (Fig. 114,2) flash three times,
battery separation is activated. Deactivate battery separation.
115Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Electrical system
9
Activating battery
disconnection (transformer/
rectifier without battery cut-
off switch):
Switch off 12 V power supply.
Press button for living area battery (Fig. 114,14) and hold it down for
approx. 10 seconds. The "V" volt (Fig. 114,2) and "A" ampere (Fig. 114,3)
symbols flash three times. The living area battery is disconnected from the
12 V power supply.
Deactivating battery
disconnection (transformer/
rectifier without battery cut-
off switch):
Press the "12 V" button (Fig. 114,18) and hold it down for approx.
5 seconds. The "V" volt symbol (Fig. 114,2) flashes three times. The living
area battery is connected to the 12 V power supply. The indicator lights up
after approx. 2 seconds.
9.8.3 Batteries gauge
The voltage and charging/discharging of the living area battery or the starter
battery voltage can be indicated using the batteries gauge.
Displays:
Press button for living area battery " " (Fig. 114,14). The "V" volt symbol
(Fig. 114,2) lights up. Depending on whether the battery is being charged
or discharged, the "A" ampere symbol lights up white or red respectively.
The battery voltage and current of the living area battery are displayed
using the LEDs in the gauge.
Press button for starter battery " " (Fig. 114,15). The "V" volt symbol
(Fig. 114,2) lights up. The battery voltage of the starter battery is displayed
using the LEDs in the gauge.
The tables below will help you interpret the statuses displayed on the panel.
When leaving the vehicle, switch off the 12 V main switch. This prevents
any unnecessary discharge of the living area battery.
Appliances such as the safety/drainage valve, charger, solar charge regu-
lator and panel consume approx. 20 mA to 65 mA of electricity from the
battery capacity, even when the 12 V main switch is turned off. Therefore
disconnect the living area battery from the 12 V power supply, if the vehicle
will not be used for a long period of time.
Volt indicator (blue)
1 LED 2 LEDs 3 LEDs 4 LEDs 5 LEDs 6 LEDs 7 LEDs 8 LEDs
< 11.0 V 11.5 V 12.0 V 12.2 V 12.5 V 12.7 V 13.0 V > 13.5 V
116 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Electrical system
9
Battery voltage
(values during
operation)
Mobile operation
(vehicle moving,
no 240 V con-
nection)
Battery opera-
tion
(vehicle station-
ary, no 240 V
connection)
Power operation
(vehicle station-
ary, 240 V con-
nection)
Danger of total
discharge (battery
alarm)
11 V or less
1)
1)
The battery guard switches all the appliances off (at 10.5 V).
12 V power sup-
ply overload
If appliances are
switched off: Bat-
tery flat
If appliances are
switched on: Bat-
tery overload
12 V power sup-
ply overload
The battery is not
charged by the al-
ternator, the alter-
nator's regulator
is defective
The battery is not
charged by the
transformer/rectifi-
er, the transform-
er/rectifier is
defective
11.5 V to 13 V 12 V power sup-
ply overload
2)
2)
If the voltage does not exceed this range for several hours.
Normal range 12 V power sup-
ply overload
2)
The battery is not
charged by the al-
ternator, the alter-
nator's regulator
is defective
The battery is not
charged by the
transformer/rectifi-
er, the transform-
er/rectifier is
defective
Over 13.5 V Battery is being
charged (main
charge)
Occurs only brief-
ly after charging
Battery is being
charged (main
charge)
Values for off-load voltage Charging condition of the battery
Less than 11 V Totally discharged
12.0 V 0 % (discharged)
12.2 V 25 %
12.3 V 50 %
12.5 V 75 %
More than 12.8 V Full
Total discharge causes irreparable damage to the battery.
Ampere indicator (blue)
1 LED 2 LEDs 3 LEDs 4 LEDs 5 LEDs 6 LEDs 7 LEDs 8 LEDs
Discharging with: Charging with:
> 30 A > 10 A > 3 A > 1 A Ap-
prox.
0A
> 1 A > 3 A > 10 A
117Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Electrical system
9
9.8.4 Tank gauge
The water and waste water quantities can be indicated using the tank gauge.
Displays:
Press tanks button " " (Fig. 114,13). The water tank " " (Fig. 114,7)
and waste water tank " " (Fig. 114,8) symbols light up. The fill level of the
water tank (left-hand scale) and the waste water tank (right-hand scale) are
indicated using the LEDs in the gauge.
The table below will help you interpret the levels displayed on the panel.
9.8.5 Alarms
Battery alarm The "V" volt symbol (Fig. 114,2) and the "11.0" LED flash as soon as the bat-
tery voltage falls below 11 V (measured during operation) and there is the
threat of a total discharge.
Measures:
When the battery alarm comes on, switch off the appliances and charge the
battery, either by mobile operation or by connection to a 240 V power
supply.
Tank alarm
The water tank symbol " " (Fig. 114,7) or waste water tank symbol " "
(Fig. 114,8) flashes when the water tank is empty or the waste water tank is
full.
Current displayed System status "A" ampere symbol
-30 A to -10 A Battery is being heavily
discharged
Lights up red
-10 A to -1 A Battery is being dis-
charged
Lights up white
0 A Battery current is low or
0A
Lights up white
+1 A to +10 A Battery being charged Lights up white
Level indicator (blue)
1 LED 2 LEDs 3 LEDs 4 LEDs 5 LEDs 6 LEDs 7 LEDs 8 LEDs
25 % 50 % 75 % 100 %
The alarm functions are only active when the corresponding display is
called up. Perform checks regularly.
It is best to perform checks in the morning, before the 12 V appliances are
switched on.
Total discharge damages the battery.
If the battery voltage falls below 10.5 V, the battery monitor in the trans-
former/rectifier switches off all of the 12 V appliances, excluding the safety/
drainage valve.
118 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Electrical system
9
Measures: Fill water tank or empty waste water tank.
9.8.6 Temperature display
The internal and external temperatures can be indicated using the digital dis-
play (Fig. 114,5).
Displays:
Press internal temperature button " " (Fig. 114,4). The internal temper-
ature is displayed.
Press external temperature button " " (Fig. 114,6). The external tem-
perature is displayed.
9.8.7 Clock gauge
The clock gauge (Fig. 114,9) displays the time. The clock has its own battery
and is not connected to the 12 V power supply.
Detach the clock if the battery needs to be replaced or the clock needs to be
set.
Detaching clock:
Turn lock (Fig. 114,10) one quarter turn. The lock is released.
Detach clock by pulling forwards.
Fitting clock:
Install clock.
Lightly press lock (Fig. 114,10) and turn a quarter turn.
Check lock by lightly pulling on the clock.
9.8.8 Switch for tank heater
The tank heater can be turned on and off using the "Res" button (Fig. 114,11).
Switching on:
Press "Res" reserve button (Fig. 114,11). The "Res" symbol lights up.
Switching off:
Press "Res" reserve button (Fig. 114,11). The "Res" symbol goes out.
9.9 240 V power supply
The 240 V power supply provides electricity for:
sockets with earth contact for appliances with maximum 16 A
refrigerator
transformer/rectifier
air conditioning unit
If, when the fill levels are called up, the LEDs in the scale flash in addition
to the tank symbol, a sensor error has occurred. Clean tank sensors.
The switch status is saved when the 12 V power supply is switched off. This
means: If the tank heater was on when the 12 V power supply was
switched off, the heater is also switched on when the 12 V power supply is
switched back on.
Only allow qualified personnel to work on the electrical system.
119Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Electrical system
9
The electrical appliances connected to the 12 V power supply of the living area
are supplied with voltage by the living area battery.
Connect the vehicle to an external 240 V power supply system as often as
possible. The charger module in the transformer/rectifier automatically
charges the living area battery. In addition to this, the starter battery is charged
with a float charge.
The air conditioning unit and other optional devices are fuse-protected by their
own two-pole automatic circuit breaker (16 A).
9.9.1 240 V connection
The vehicle can be connected to an external 240 V power supply. The cable
may have a length of maximum 25 m.
9.9.2 Power cable for external 240 V connection
Power cable
Three-core (3 x 2.5 mm
2
) flexible rubber sheathed cable
Maximum 25 m in length
1 plug with earth contact
1 socket with earth contact (plug-in devices according to EN 60309)
Connection possibilities For your power cable, we recommend using a CEE connection cable with a
CEE plug and coupling. If this type of connection is not feasible, we recom-
mend the following combination with a safety plug:
The external 240 V power supply must be protected by fuse with a fault
current protection switch (FI-switches, 30 mA).
For the connection points on camp sites (camping distributors) highly sen-
sitive fault current protection switches (FI-switches, 30 mA) are obligatory.
Completely unwind the cable on cable drums to prevent overheating.
120 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Electrical system
9
Adapter cable:
CEE 17 socket with earth contact (Fig. 115,1) – plug with earth contact
(Fig. 115,2)
Cable reel:
Socket with earth contact (Fig. 115,3) – plug with earth contact (Fig. 115,4)
Adapter cable:
CEE 17 socket with earth contact (Fig. 115,5) – plug with earth contact
(Fig. 115,6)
Depending on the design, the flap for the 240 V connection is designated with
the symbol " ".
Connecting the power
cable:
Open external flap.
Depending on the design, tilt the cover upwards.
Insert connector.
9.10 Fuses
9.10.1 12 V fuses
The appliances connected to the 12 V power supply in the living area are
fused individually. The fuses are accessible at different positions in the
vehicle.
Fig. 115 Connection possibilities 240 V
connection
Fig. 116 Connecting an angled con-
nector with socket
When using a CEE 17 angled connector with rear socket (Fig. 116,1)
only use a rubberised and sealed IP 44 socket with earth contact
(Fig. 116,2). Do not use sockets without earth contact (Fig. 116,3).
Danger of electrocution!
Depending on the design, disconnect the connector before removing it.
Only replace defective fuses when the cause of the defect is known and
has been remedied.
Replace defective fuses only after the power supply has been turned off.
Never bridge or repair fuses.
121Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Electrical system
9
An intact 12 V fuse can be detected by the unbroken fuse element
(Fig. 117,1). If the fuse element is broken (Fig. 117,2), change the fuse.
Fuses on the starter
battery
The fuses are fitted in the engine compartment above the starter battery.
Depending on the model, the type and rating of the fuses may differ to those
shown here.
Fuses on the living area
battery
The fuses are fitted next to the living area battery.
Depending on the model, the type and rating of the fuses may differ to those
shown here.
Fig. 117 12 V fuse
1 Unbroken fuse element
2 Broken fuse element
Before changing the fuses, check the rating and colour of the fuses in ques-
tion. When changing fuses, use only fuses with the same ratings as the
fuses fitted at the factory.
Fig. 118 Fuses on the starter battery
1 Jumbo flat fuse 60 A/blue
(for the transformer/rectifier)
2 Jumbo flat fuse 20 A/yellow
(for refrigerator and charging line)
3 Flat fuse 2 A/grey
(for alternator D+)
Fig. 119 Fuses on the living area battery
1 Jumbo flat fuse 20 A/yellow
(for the optional device)
2 Jumbo flat fuse 60 A/blue
(for the transformer/rectifier)
3 Flat fuse 2 A/grey
(for battery charger sensor)
122 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Electrical system
9
Fuse for the Thetford
toilet (swivel toilet)
The fuse is located in the locker wall of the Thetford cassette.
Changing:
Open the flap for the Thetford cassette on the outside of the vehicle.
Pull out the Thetford cassette completely.
Replace fuse (Fig. 120,1 or Fig. 121,1 ).
9.10.2 240 V fuse
Depending on the model and optional devices, the number of automatic circuit
breakers may differ from the example shown here.
The 240 V connection is protected by a two-pole automatic circuit breaker
(Fig. 122,4) (10 A).
Position Depending on the model, the automatic circuit breakers are installed in the
wardrobe or rear garage.
Fig. 120 Fuse for the Thetford toilet
1 Flat fuse 3 A/purple
Fig. 121 Fuse for the Thetford toilet
(alternative)
Fig. 122 240 V automatic circuit
breakers
1 Automatic circuit breaker for the air
conditioning unit
2 Automatic circuit breaker for the
optional device
3 Fault current protection switch
4 Automatic circuit breaker 240 V con-
nection
123Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Appliances
10
10Applianc es
Chapter overview
This chapter contains instructions regarding the appliances of the vehicle.
The instructions refer exclusively to the operation of the appliances.
Further information about the appliances can be found in the instruction man-
uals for the appliances, included separately with the vehicle.
The instructions address the following topics:
heater
boiler
gas cooker
gas oven
microwave oven
extractor hood
refrigerator
air conditioning unit
dishwasher
vacuum cleaner
10.1 General
The heater, boiler, cooker, refrigerator and air conditioning unit are fitted
depending on the model of the vehicle.
In this instruction manual a description is given only for the operation of the
appliances and their particular features.
To operate gas appliances, first open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and
the gas isolator tap corresponding to the appliance.
The heat exchanger of the Alde hot-water heater has to be replaced after
10 years. Only the manufacturer of the heater or an authorised specialist
workshop is allowed to replace the heat exchanger. The operator of the
heater must see to it that the parts are replaced.
For safety reasons, spare parts for pieces of heating appliances must cor-
respond with manufacturer's instructions and be permitted by the manufac-
turer as a spare part. These spare parts may only be fitted by the
manufacturer or an authorised specialist workshop.
Further information can be obtained in the instruction manual for the
respective appliance.
Fig. 123 Symbols for the gas isolator
taps
1 Refrigerator
2Cooker
3 Heater/boiler
4Oven
124 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Appliances
10
10.2 Alde hot-water heater
Initial start-up When lighting the heater for the first time a small amount of smoke and odour
will occur. Immediately set the operating switch of the heater to its highest
position. Open doors and windows and ventilate well. Smoke and odour will
disappear by themselves after a while.
Operating unit The operating unit is divided into two sections:
Display (touch screen)
Control buttons
Never let gas escape unburned due to danger of explosion.
Never run the heater in gas operation when refuelling, on ferries or in the
garage. Danger of explosion!
Never operate the heater in gas operation in closed spaces (e.g.
garages). Danger of poisoning and suffocation!
Never run hot-water heater without heating fluid. Observe notes in
chapter 13.
Never drill holes in the floor. This might damage the hot-water pipes.
Do not use the space above and behind the heater as a storage compart-
ment.
The circulating pump must always be turned on when the hot-water heater
is in operation.
We recommend to bleed the heating system after the initial heater opera-
tion and to check the glycol content. Observe notes in chapter 13.
When the heater is turned on, it starts with the last settings used.
For further information, see the separate manufacturer's instruction manual
and observe the maintenance instructions found in chapter 13.
For further information about the use of the boiler see section "Boiler".
Fig. 124 Operating unit for hot-water
heater
1 Display (touch screen)
2 "Menu" button
3 On/Off button
When no button is pressed, the operating unit automatically switches to
home position after two minutes.
Changes to the settings are saved automatically after 10 seconds.
125Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Appliances
10
Control buttons The control buttons have the following functions:
Display The display (Fig. 124,1) is designed as a touch screen. Touching the symbols
calls up the relevant function.
Start screen The Start screen appears on the display after the heater is switched on. The
Start screen contains the following information:
Adjustment menu The "MENU" button calls up the adjustment menu. The meanings of the indi-
vidual symbols are described in the following table.
The values can be increased or reduced via the "+" or "-" symbols.
Tool menus The various heater functions can be called up and adjusted via the tool menus.
The arrow symbols are used to change between the menus. The meanings of
the individual symbols are described in the manufacturer's instruction manual.
Selecting the operating
mode
The hot-water heater can be operated with the following energy sources:
Gas operation
240 V electrical operation
Gas and 240 V electrical operation
The operating mode is selected from the operating unit.
Selecting gas operation:
Press the "On" button next to the " " symbol. The gas operation is acti-
vated.
Selecting 240 V electrical
operation:
Press the "+" button next to the " " symbol until the desired heat output
is reached.
Pos. in
Fig. 124
Button Function
2 MENU Open adjustment menu
3
Activate heating
Symbol Signification
This symbol appears when the circulating pump is activated
This symbol appears when a switching facility for gas cylinders
is activated
This symbol appears when a voltage of 240 V is present at the
heater
The internal temperature is displayed next to this symbol
The external temperature is displayed next to this symbol if an
external sensor is fitted
Symbol Signification
Set the desired temperature of +5 °C to +30 °C
Set the water temperature in the boiler
Set the heat output in electrical operation
Activate the function "Heating in gas operation"
Call up the enabling menu for the tool menus
126 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Appliances
10
Selecting gas and 240 V
electrical operation:
Select gas operation and 240 V electrical operation on the operating unit.
When the heater is turned on, it starts with the last set operating mode.
Switching on the heater:
Press " " button. The Start screen appears in the display. The heater
starts automatically.
Switching the heater off:
Press " " button. The heater is turned off.
10.2.1 Alde heat exchanger
The heat exchanger can be used to heat the living area of the vehicle during
travel without operating the hot-water heater in the living area.
The heat exchanger is connected to the vehicle engine's cooling circuit and
thus has the same function as the vehicle heater.
Heat output is set with the living area's heating regulator.
The heat exchanger stopcock is located directly on the exchanger.
Turning on:
Set stopcock handle (Fig. 125,1) parallel to the pipe.
Shutting off:
Set drain cock handle (Fig. 125,1) at a right angle to the pipe.
Select the output level during 240 V electrical operation in such a way that
it corresponds to the 240 V connection protection:
Level 1 (1050 W) at 6 A
Level 2 (2100 W) at 10 A
Level 3 (3150 W) at 16 A
If gas and 240 V electrical operation is selected and if the vehicle is con-
nected to the 240 V power supply, then the hot-water heater at first only
operates in 240 V electric operation. Only if the heat output is insufficient
does the gas operation also automatically switch on.
The gas operation is only possible when the regulator tap on the gas bottle
and the gas isolator tap are opened.
240 V electrical operation is only possible when the vehicle is connected to
the 240 V power supply.
The heat exchanger only works when the vehicle engine is running.
If the heat exchanger is not being used (as in the summer), the heat
exchanger on the stopcock should be shut off.
Fig. 125 Alde heat exchanger
127Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Appliances
10
10.2.2 Alde auxiliary circulating pump
The auxiliary circulating pump (Fig. 126,1) can be used to heat the vehicle
engine when parked.
The auxiliary circulating pump is connected to the vehicle engine's cooling cir-
cuit and thus functions as an engine heater.
The auxiliary circulating pump switch (Fig. 127,2) is located behind the front
passenger's seat. The yellow indicator lamp (Fig. 127,1) illuminates when the
pump is operated.
10.2.3 Setting the rotational speed of the circulating pump
The rotational speed of the circulating pump can be set with the sliding switch
(Fig. 128,2). At a lower rotary speed, the operating sounds of the pump are
quieter.
The sliding regulator is located in the hot-water heater area.
Setting the output:
Push sliding trap (Fig. 128,1) towards the right. The output is reduced.
Push sliding trap towards the left. The output is increased.
The auxiliary circulating pump works only if the heat exchanger has been
installed and started, and the hot-water heater is running.
Fig. 126 Auxiliary circulating pump Fig. 127 Operating switch for auxiliary
circulating pump
The hot-water heater is equipped with a very powerful pump. Only operate
the pump for approx. 5 minutes on full output when the system is emptied
or the pipes are bled. Otherwise, this will increase wear; loud operating
noises are the result.
Fig. 128 Rotational speed reduction
switch
128 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Appliances
10
10.3 Independent vehicle heater
The inside and the engine can be heated with the independent vehicle heater.
The heating of the engine can be switched off.
The independent vehicle heater can be turned on and off manually or with a
timer. The time for the heating to start can be exactly preselected from
1 minute to 24 hours. It is possible to program three switching on times, of
which only one can be activated. The maximum permitted operation time is
60 minutes.
Switching on manually:
Press the button (Fig. 129,7). The heating mode is displayed by the symbol
(Fig. 129,9). The fan will only be switched on when there is a coolant tem-
perature of 30 °C.
Switching off manually:
Press the button (Fig. 129,7). The symbol (Fig. 129,9) goes off.
Switching on the engine
heating:
Press the lower part of the switch (Fig. 129,4). Engine is preheated. The
fan is switched on immediately.
Switching off the engine
heating:
Press the upper part of the switch (Fig. 129,4). Engine stays cold.
Setting the time:
Press the button (Fig. 129,2). The time setting is displayed by the symbol
(Fig. 129,8).
Set the time with the buttons (Fig. 129,3 and 6).
Programming heating start:
Press the button (Fig. 129,5).
Set the switching on time within ten seconds, with the buttons (Fig. 129,3
and 6).
Selecting programmed
switching on time:
Keep pressing button (Fig. 129,5) until the selected programme number
(Fig. 129,1) appears in the display.
Do not operate the independent vehicle heater in closed spaces. Danger
of suffocation!
Do not operate the independent vehicle heater at petrol stations. Danger
of explosion!
Fig. 129 Operating unit for independent
vehicle heater
129Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Appliances
10
10.4 Alde boiler
10.4.1 Switching the boiler on/off
The boiler is integrated in the hot-water heater. A separate operation is not
possible. For operating the hot-water heater, see section 10.2.
10.4.2 Filling/emptying the boiler
The boiler can be supplied with water from the water tank.
Filling the boiler with water:
Close drain cock. Position the rocking lever (Fig. 130,1) horizontally.
Switch on 12 V power supply on the panel.
Set all the water taps to "Hot" and open them. The water pump is turned
on. The warm water pipes are filled with water.
Keep the taps open until the water flowing out of the taps has no bubbles
in it. This is the only way to ensure that the boiler is full of water.
Close all water taps.
Emptying the boiler:
Switch off boiler.
Open all water taps and set to the central position.
Never let gas escape unburned due to danger of explosion.
Never run the boiler in gas operation when refuelling, on ferries or in the
garage. Danger of explosion!
Never operate the boiler in gas operation in closed spaces (e.g.
garages). Danger of poisoning and suffocation!
The water in the boiler can be heated up to 65 °C. Risk of scalding!
Never use boiler when empty.
If the boiler is not being used, empty it if there is any risk of frost.
Only operate the boiler with the maximum temperature setting if you
require a large quantity of warm water. This protects the boiler against the
build-up of limescale.
Dethleffs recommends that water from the boiler is not used as drinking
water.
Fig. 130 Drain cock
130 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Appliances
10
Open drain cock (Fig. 130). To do so, set the rocking lever (Fig. 130,1) in
a vertical position. The boiler is drained to the outside using the drain cock.
Check whether the water has been drained completely from the boiler
(approx. 12.5 litres).
10.5 Cooker
10.5.1 Gas cooker
The vehicle kitchen unit is fitted with a three-burner gas cooker.
The gas cooker is equipped with electronic ignition.
Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction
manual.
Never let gas escape unburned due to danger of explosion.
Before using the cooker make sure that there is sufficient ventilation.
Open windows or the skylight.
Do not use gas cooker or gas oven for heating.
Always protect your hands with cooking gloves or potholders when han-
dling hot pots, pans and similar items. There is a risk of injury.
During activation and operation of the gas cooker, no flammable objects
or highly inflammable objects such as dishcloths, napkins etc. must be
near the gas cooker. Fire hazard!
The process of ignition must be visible from above and must not be cov-
ered by cooking pans placed on the cooker.
Depending on the model, the gas cooker lid is held closed by a spring.
When closing there is danger of getting injured!
Do not use the glass gas cooker lid as a hob.
Do not close the gas cooker lid while the gas cooker is in operation.
Do not apply pressure on the gas cooker lid when it is closed.
Do not place hot cooking pans on the gas cooker lid.
Keep the gas cooker lid open after cooking until the burners are cool. Oth-
erwise the glass plate could shatter.
Do not place hot objects such as cooking pans on the sink cover. The
plastic can become deformed.
Only use pots and pans whose diameter is appropriate for the gas cooker
burners.
When the flame goes out, the thermocouple automatically cuts the gas
supply.
Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual
"Gas cooker".
131Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Appliances
10
Switching on: Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Cooker".
Open the gas cooker lid.
Turn the control knob (Fig. 131,1 or Fig. 132,1) on the burner you wish to
use to the ignition position (large flame).
Press the control knob down and hold it.
Press the rocker switch (Fig. 131,2) if necessary until there is a flame.
Once the flame is burning, the control knob must be held down for 10 to
15 seconds, until the thermocouple automatically keeps the gas supply
open.
Release the control knob and turn to the desired setting.
Switching off:
Turn the control knob to the 0-position. The flame fades.
Close the gas isolator tap "Cooker" and the regulator tap on the gas bottle.
10.5.2 Gas oven
Fig. 131 Operating controls for gas
cooker
Fig. 132 Operating controls for gas
cooker (alternative)
Keep the ventilation openings on the gas oven open at all times.
There must be no flammable objects near the gas oven when it is being
lit.
The oven flap must remain open when it is being lit.
If ignition has not taken place, repeat the entire procedure. If necessary,
check if there is gas and/or current in the gas oven.
If the gas oven still does not work, close the gas isolator tap and notify
your service centre.
If the burner flame is accidentally extinguished, switch the oven off and
leave the burner off for at least 1 minute. Then ignite it again.
When grilling, pull out the heat guard and leave the flap fully open.
Before using the gas oven for the first time run it for 30 minutes at max-
imum temperature without any contents.
When the flame goes out, the thermocouple automatically cuts the gas
supply.
Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual
"Gas oven".
132 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Appliances
10
Switching on: Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Oven".
Fully open the oven flap (Fig. 133,3).
Lightly press control knob (Fig. 133,2) and set to " " (oven) or " "
(grill).
Press the control knob (Fig. 133,2) and hold it down for 5 to 10 seconds.
Gas will stream into the burner.
Press the lighting switch (Fig. 133,1) repeatedly until there is a flame.
Once the flame is burning, the control knob must be held down for 10 to
15 seconds, until the thermocouple automatically keeps the gas supply
open.
Release the control knob and turn to the desired setting.
Switching off:
Turn control knob (Fig. 133,2) to " ". The flame fades.
Close the gas isolator tap "Oven" and the regulator tap on the gas bottle.
10.5.3 Microwave oven
Fig. 133 Gas oven
Only qualified personnel may repair the microwave oven. Improper
repairs can cause major risks to the user.
The protection device against the escape of microwave energy should
never be removed.
Use the microwave oven only if it has been properly installed.
Only use the microwave oven when the door seal is free of damage.
Never leave the microwave oven unattended when it is in operation.
If there is smoke, keep the microwave oven closed, switch it off and
interrupt the power supply.
Operate the microwave oven only with the rotary plate and the rotary cross
in place.
Use only crockery suitable for microwave use.
133Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Appliances
10
Switching on: Open the door and place foodstuffs into the cooking area.
Close the door. A clicking noise can be heard when it engages.
Select the output on the control knob (Fig. 134,1).
Select the cooking time with the control knob (Fig. 134,2). Cooking begins.
The end of the cooking process is signalled by a signal tone. The microwave
oven will switch off automatically.
Switching off:
Open the door and remove foodstuffs.
10.5.4 Extractor hood
The cooking area is equipped with an extractor hood. The two-level fan blows
the cooking steam directly outside.
Use the switch (example: Fig. 135,1) to turn the extractor hood on and off.
Use the switch (example: Fig. 135,2) to turn the cooker lamps on and off.
The microwave oven only functions with correct 240 V power supply. In the
case of fluctuations of the voltage or of voltage below 230 V, the microwave
oven switches itself off completely. Therefore, do not switch on additional
240 V appliances when the microwave oven is in operation. Particularly in
southern countries it happens that the line voltage is described as having
230 V but it really does not amount to this value. So it may happen that the
microwave oven cannot be operated in these countries.
Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual
"Microwave oven".
Fig. 134 Operating controls for micro-
wave oven
Fig. 135 Extractor hood Fig. 136 Extractor hood (alternative)
134 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Appliances
10
10.6 Refrigerator
During the journey, only operate the refrigerator via the 12 V power supply. At
high ambient temperatures the refrigerator is unable to reach its full cooling
power. At high external temperatures, the full cooling power of the cooling unit
is only guaranteed if the refrigerator is ventilated sufficiently. In order to
achieve a better ventilation the refrigerator ventilation grill can be removed.
10.6.1 Refrigerator ventilation grill
Removal: Turn screw (Fig. 137,1) one quarter turn using a coin.
Remove refrigerator ventilation grill.
10.6.2 Operation (Dometic 7 series with automatic power selection
and frame heater)
Operating modes The refrigerator is equipped with automatic power selection (AES). The AES
automatically selects the optimal energy source and regulates the refrigerator
operation. Manual intervention to select the type of power is possible but not
required.
The AES selects from the following types of power:
Solar installation 12 V
240 V AC
12 V DC
Gas
Choosing the available energy source highest on the list.
When leaving the vehicle, always mount the refrigerator ventilation grill.
Otherwise water can enter during rain.
Fig. 137 Refrigerator ventilation grill
Even when the 12 V power supply is switched off, a small electrical power
flows which puts an extra load on the living area battery. Always switch off
the refrigerator for a temporary lay-up.
135Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Appliances
10
240 V operation If the 240 V power supply is connected, this energy source is selected as the
first priority by the AES.
12 V operation 12 V operation is only selected by the AES if the vehicle's engine is running
and the alternator supplies sufficient 12 V operating power.
Gas operation
If the 240 V power supply is not connected and the vehicle's engine is not run-
ning the AES selects the gas supply. When selecting gas operation the igni-
tion fuse is opened automatically so gas can get into the burner. At the same
time the electronic ignition is activated. If the gas flame is extinguished, e.g. by
blast of wind, the ignition is activated immediately and re-ignites the gas.
When the gas operation is faulty, the "GAS" indicator lamp (Fig. 138,4) flashes
red.
Change-over between
energy sources
When changing over between the different power sources there are forced
delays built in the AES. This means, that after a change-over to a new energy
source the refrigerator can not be operated immediately. When changing over
from 12 V operation to gas operation, a 15-minute delay is built in the AES.
This prevents a change-over to gas operation when the vehicle is stopped
briefly and the engine is switched off (e.g. stop to fill tank).
Refrigerating temperature
control
When turned on the first time the refrigerator automatically selects the middle
thermostat position. This position can be adjusted manually by using the con-
trol knob (Fig. 138,6). The indicator lamps (Fig. 138,5) show the selected ther-
mostat position. The refrigerating temperature for the three types of energy is
set with the control knob. It takes a few hours till the refrigerator reaches its
Fig. 138 Operating controls for the
refrigerator (Dometic 7 series
with AES and FH)
1 Frame heater (FH) button
2 Indicator lamp
3 Energy selector switch
4 Indicator lamps
5 Indicator lamps
6 Control knob for setting the tempera-
ture
Never let gas escape unburned due to danger of explosion.
It is not permitted to operate the refrigerator with car gas.
Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Refriger-
ator".
Open flames are prohibited at petrol stations. If the stop takes longer
than 15 minutes, the refrigerator has to be turned off at the energy
selector switch.
136 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Appliances
10
normal operating temperature. When changing over the operating mode the
thermostat setting will be maintained. The refrigerating temperature is retained
regardless of the type of power being used.
Frame heater (FH)
High external temperatures and high humidity can cause drops of water to
form on the metal frame of the freezer compartment. This is why the refriger-
ator is equipped with a frame heater for the freezer compartment. If the tem-
perature and humidity are high, switch on the frame heater by pressing the
button (Fig. 138,1). This prevents corrosion. If the frame heater is switched on,
the indicator lamp (Fig. 138,2) will be lit.
Manual operation
Switching on:
Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Refriger-
ator".
Select the energy type with the energy selector switch (Fig. 138,3). The
respective indicator lamp (Fig. 138,4) lights up green.
Adjust refrigerating temperature with the control knob (Fig. 138,6). The
indicator lamps (Fig. 138,5) show the selected thermostat position.
When the gas operation is faulty, the "GAS" indicator lamp (Fig. 138,4) flashes
red.
When operated with 12 V, the refrigerator draws power only from the living
area battery.
Switching off:
Turn the energy selector switch (Fig. 138,3) to " ". No indicator lamp
(Fig. 138,4) is lit.
Close the gas isolator tap "Refrigerator" and the regulator tap on the gas
bottle.
If the frame heater is switched on, it will always consume current. There-
fore, switch off the frame heater if the vehicle engine is off and the vehicle
is not connected to the 240 V power supply.
If the refrigerator is manually set to "12 V", it will constantly consume cur-
rent. Therefore, switch over to gas operation when the vehicle engine is
not running, and the vehicle is not connected to the 240 V power supply.
Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual
"Refrigerator".
137Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Appliances
10
10.6.3 Operation (Kissmann)
Operating modes The refrigerator is only operated with 12 V or 24 V DC.
Switching on:
Open the panel above the conversion door.
Switch on the refrigerator with the switch (Fig. 139,1). The indicator lamp
(Fig. 139,2) shows it is in operation.
Turn the temperature controller (Fig. 140,1) from position "0" to "1".
If the interior lighting is not on, switch the switch (Fig. 140,2) to the "I" posi-
tion.
Switching off:
Switch off the refrigerator with the switch (Fig. 139,1). The indicator lamp
(Fig. 139,2) goes out.
Adjust the temperature:
Set the temperature with the temperature controller (Fig. 140,1).
Position "1" = lowest cooling power
Position "7" = highest cooling power
Defrosting:
Switch off the refrigerator.
Switch off the interior lighting with the switch (Fig. 140,2).
Open the doors of the refrigerator and the freezer compartment and leave
them open.
Mop up the defrosting water with a sponge or cloth.
Clean the unit (see chapter 12).
Fig. 139 Operating controls outside the
refrigerator
Fig. 140 Operating controls in the refrig-
erator
When frozen food is kept in the freezer compartment, temperatures of
-18 °C or lower are reached in the freezer compartment even when the
temperature controller is set to a low setting.
The refrigerator temperature depends on the ambient temperature (instal-
lation location), the frequency the door is opened with and the charging. If
necessary, readjust the temperature controller.
Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction
manual.
138 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Appliances
10
10.6.4 Refrigerator door locking mechanism
The refrigerator has a separate freezer compartment. The specifications in
this section correspondingly also apply to the door of the freezer compartment.
Depending on the model, it is possible to lock the refrigerator door in two posi-
tions:
Closed refrigerator door during travel and when the refrigerator is in oper-
ation
Slightly opened refrigerator door as a ventilation position when the refrig-
erator is switched off
Dometic 7 series with
separate freezer
compartment
Opening:
Push the lock (Fig. 141,1) to the side, so that the open lock " "
(Fig. 141,3) is completely visible.
Use recessed grip to open refrigerator door/freezer compartment door.
Closing:
Fully close the refrigerator door/freezer compartment door.
Push the lock (Fig. 141,1) to the side, so that the closed lock " "
(Fig. 141,2) is completely visible.
Locking in the ventilation
position:
Slightly open refrigerator door/freezer compartment door.
Push the lock completely to the right. The door latch (Fig. 142,1) keeps the
refrigerator door/freezer compartment door in a fixed position. The refriger-
ator door/freezer compartment door will then stay slightly open (Fig. 142).
During the journey the refrigerator door must always be closed and locked
in the closed position.
When the refrigerator is switched off, bring the refrigerator door into the
ventilation position and lock it in place if possible. This prevents mould
forming.
Fig. 141 Locking of the refrigerator
door/freezer compartment
door (Dometic 7 series with
separate freezer compartment)
Fig. 142 Refrigerator door/freezer com-
partment door in ventilation
position (Dometic 7 series with
separate freezer compartment)
139Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Appliances
10
Kissmann with separate
freezer compartment
Opening:
Rotate lock (Fig. 143,1) towards the outside.
Open the refrigerator door at the handle.
Closing:
Fully close the refrigerator door.
Turn lock (Fig. 144,1) towards the centre of the refrigerator.
Bringing into the ventilation
position:
Open the refrigerator door.
Turn the lock inwards.
Close the refrigerator door. The refrigerator door will stay slightly open.
10.7 Air conditioning unit
The air conditioning unit is installed in the rear garage on the right behind a
flap. The remote control (Fig. 146) for the air conditioning unit and the receiver
(Fig. 145) is in the kitchen area.
To execute the individual switching commands, always point the remote con-
trol in the direction of the receiver.
Fig. 143 Refrigerator door in operation
position
Fig. 144 Refrigerator door locked
Locking in the ventilation position is not possible.
The air conditioning unit only runs if the vehicle is connected to a 240 V
power supply.
The external 240 V power supply must be protected by a fuse of at least
3 A. It is otherwise not possible to operate the air conditioning unit properly.
Fig. 145 Receiver Fig. 146 Remote control
140 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Appliances
10
Switching on: Connect the vehicle to the 240 V power supply. The air conditioning unit is
ready to operate.
Switch on the remote control with the switch (Fig. 146,7). The green indi-
cator lamp (Fig. 145,1) indicates cooling mode.
Set the desired operating mode with the key (Fig. 146,8).
"FAN": Only ventilation without cooling.
"COMFORT": Cooling. The fan output and the room temperature can be
set separately. The green indicator lamp in the receiver indicates the
compressor is in operation and therefore cooling mode.
Set the desired fan output and room temperature with the keys (Fig. 146,3
and 4) if necessary. The arrow (Fig. 146,9) indicates the selected setting
mode.
If the temperature set on the remote control is reached, the green indicator
lamp goes out, the compressor is switched off and the circulation fan con-
tinues to run.
Switching off:
To switch off, press the key (Fig. 146,7) on the remote control again.
Timer The air conditioning unit can be switched on or off automatically from the cur-
rent time up to 15 hours in advance with the integrated timer. Pre-program-
ming up to a certain time is not possible.
To program, switch on the air conditioning unit with the key (Fig. 146,7) on
the remote control.
Set the desired operating mode and room temperature with the keys
(Fig. 146,8, 3 and 4).
Use the key (Fig. 146,5) to select the desired function (Fig. 146,1):
"ON": Switching on
"OFF": Switching off
Use the keys (Fig. 146,4) to select the desired switching time (1 to
15 hours). The arrow (Fig. 146,2) flashes and indicates the setting mode.
If "ON" (switch on) was selected, the air conditioning unit must be switched
off again with the remote control after the setting process. The indicator
lamp in the receiver flashes and confirms the programming.
The indicator lamp in the receiver flashes and confirms the programming if
"OFF" (switch off) was selected. Do not switch off the air conditioning unit
with the remote control.
An additional key switch (Fig. 145,2) is on the receiver, which can be used
to switch the air conditioning unit off or on without remote control. If the air
conditioning unit is switched on by means of this key switch, the operating
mode set last on the remote control is automatically selected.
Condensation accumulates on the vaporiser in cooling mode. To counter-
act any formation of germs, operate the air conditioning unit about 5 to
10 minutes in the "FAN" and "HIGH" positions to dry the vaporiser.
141Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Appliances
10
10.8 Dishwasher
The multi-display can show the following information:
Set hardness level
Set start time
Remaining time of the washing program
Error code
The indicator lamps show when there is no salt or rinsing liquid.
Switching on:
Fill in detergent and rinsing liquid if necessary.
Close the door.
To go easy on the batteries in the remote control, the infrared transmitter
can be covered by hand and the remote control then switched off after the
"OFF" programming. In this way no signal is transferred to the receiver and
the programming is retained.
The key (Fig. 146,6) is used to send the settings of the remote control
repeatedly to the receiver.
Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction
manual.
Repairs to the dishwasher may only be carried out be qualified per-
sonnel.
Detergents for dishwashers are very corrosive. Therefore, never store
detergents on the sink or within reach of children and never use for other
purposes.
Do not open the dishwasher door when the program is running or directly
at the end of the program. Hot steam can escape.
Use only dishwasher-proof crockery.
Fill the salt container with special salt before the first washing cycle to pro-
tect the dishwasher against damage from chalk.
Further information is available in the separate instruction manual "Dish-
washer".
Fig. 147 Operating controls for the dish-
washer
1 On/Off button
2 Button for setting the water softener
3 Multi-display
4 Display lamps and indicator lamps
5 Button for delayed start
6 Keys for program selection
142 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Appliances
10
Press the "On/Off" button (Fig. 147,1). All program displays (Fig. 147,6)
light up.
Press switch (Fig. 147,6) for desired program. All other program displays
go out.
The three upper display lamps (Fig. 147,4) provide information about the pro-
gram sequence:
Switching off:
Press the "On/Off" button (Fig. 147,1).
Pull door lock upward and open the door.
Pumping out water:
Shut off the water supply to the dishwasher.
Switch on the dishwasher. The pump pumps the remaining water out of the
pipes and the machine.
Switch off the dishwasher.
10.9 Central vacuum cleaner
Cleaning cycle in operation
Drying cycle in operation
Program cycle ended
Do not switch off the dishwasher until the display lamp " " indicates the
end of the program.
If the vehicle is not going to be used for a long period or if it is not heated
when there is a risk of frost, pump off all water from the dishwasher. This
prevents deposits and frost damage.
Do not suck up any sharp-edged or pointed objects such as needles,
nails or razor blades. Risk of injury when changing the filter!
Do not suck in any flammable or combustible liquids. Fire hazard!
Do not allow children to play with the vacuum cleaner.
Keep hair, loose clothing fingers and other parts of the body away from
the intake openings.
Operate the vacuum cleaner only when a dust bag and all filters have been
inserted.
Do not suck in any hot or smoldering objects such as cigarettes or hot ash.
Do not suck in any large objects such as paper tissues. These could block
the hose.
The vacuum cleaner can get very hot during operation. If this happens, the
motor switches itself off automatically. The vacuum cleaner is ready for use
again after a cooling-down period of approx. 1 hour.
Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction
manual.
143Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Appliances
10
Connections In the vehicle there are two hose connections and an intake opening with a
foot pedal.
Operation The vacuum cleaner can be operated in various modes.
Connecting a hose:
Lift the flap (Fig. 148,1) on the hose connection.
Rotate the hose slightly and push it gently into the opening (Fig. 148,3).
As soon as the contacts on the end of the hose touch the contacts in the
hose connection (Fig. 148,2), the vacuum cleaner starts up automatically.
Activating the intake
opening:
Tilt the foot pedal (Fig. 149,2) to the right. The vacuum cleaner starts up.
Brush the dust in front of the intake opening (Fig. 149,1). The dust is
sucked in.
Switching off the vacuum
cleaner:
When the hose is connected: Rotate the hose slightly and pull it out of the
connection.
When the intake opening is in operation: Tilt the foot pedal to the left.
Changing the dust bag:
Press the unlocking device (Fig. 150,1) upwards.
Open the flap (Fig. 150,2).
Carefully pull the dust bag (Fig. 151,2) off the pipe tube (Fig. 151,1) and
remove it.
Insert a new dust bag into the opening.
Fig. 148 Hose connection Fig. 149 Intake opening with foot pedal
Only change the bag when the vacuum cleaner is switched off.
Fig. 150 Flap for dust bag Fig. 151 Dust bag
144 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Appliances
10
Attach the new dust bag onto the short tube. When doing this, first press
the cardboard disk on the dust bag into the rear top corner and then pull
the front part of the cardboard disk upwards.
Close flap. Lock must audibly lock into place.
145Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Sanitary fittings
11
11Sa nitary fittings
Chapter overview
This chapter contains instructions regarding the sanitary fittings of the vehicle.
The instructions address the following topics:
water tank
waste water tank
complete water system
toilet compartment
toilet
11.1 Water supply, general
The vehicle is equipped with a fitted water tank. An electric water pump pumps
the water to the individual water taps. Opening a water tap automatically
switches on the water pump and pumps water to the tap.
The waste water tank collects the waste water. The water level in the water
and waste water tanks can be checked on the panel.
Fill water tank from supply systems that have been verified to provide
drinking water quality.
Only use such hoses or containers when filling that have been approved
for use with drinking water.
Thoroughly rinse filling hose or container with drinking water before use
(2 to 3 times capacity).
Empty filling hose or container completely after use and close openings
of the filling hose or container.
Water left standing in the water tank or in the water pipes becomes
undrinkable after a short period. Therefore, before each use of the
vehicle, thoroughly clean the water pipes and the water tank. After each
use of the vehicle completely empty the water tank and the water pipes.
In the case of lay-ups lasting more than a week disinfect the water
system before using the vehicle.
If the vehicle is not used for several days or if it is not heated when there is
a risk of frost, empty the entire water system. Leave the water taps on in
central position. Leave the safety/drainage valve (if there is one) and all
drain cocks open. Frost damage to appliances, frost damage to the vehicle
and deposits in water-carrying components can be avoided in this way.
The water pump will overheat without water and can get damaged. Never
operate water pump when the water tank is empty.
Before using the water fittings, the 12 V power supply on the panel must be
switched on. Otherwise the water pump will not work.
146 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Sanitary fittings
11
Position of the water
pump
The water pump (Fig. 152,1) is mounted on the outside of the water tank.
11.2 Water tank
11.2.1 Drinking water filler neck with cap
The drinking water filler neck is on the right or left side of the vehicle,
depending on the model.
The drinking water filler neck is labelled by the word "WASSER" (water)
(Fig. 153,1) or marked by the symbol " " (Fig. 154,1). The cap is opened or
closed using the key for the external flap locks.
Opening:
Insert key into locking cylinder (Fig. 153,2) and turn a quarter turn in an
anticlockwise direction.
Remove cap.
Fill the water tank with drinking water.
Closing:
Place the cap on the drinking water filler neck.
Turn key one quarter turn in a clockwise direction.
Remove the key.
Check that the cap sits firmly on the drinking water filler neck.
Fig. 152 Water pump
Fig. 153 Cap for the drinking water filler
neck
Fig. 154 Cap for the drinking water filler
neck (alternative)
147Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Sanitary fittings
11
11.2.2 Water drainage
Depending on the model, the drain cock (Fig. 155,1) is installed in the double
floor on either the left or right side of the vehicle. The drain cock is labelled by
the word "Wasser" (water).
A cap (Fig. 156,2) closes the water drain neck (Fig. 156,1).
A hose line can be connected to the water drain neck (Fig. 156,1).
11.2.3 Filling with water
To fill the water tank with drinking water, proceed as follows:
Open drinking water filler neck (Fig. 153).
Fill the water tank with drinking water. Use a water hose, a water canister
with a funnel or similar for filling.
Close drinking water filler neck.
11.2.4 Draining water
To empty the water tank, proceed as follows:
Unlock and remove the cap (Fig. 156,2) from the water drain neck
(Fig. 156,1) by turning it a quarter turn in a clockwise direction.
Mount suitable hose to the water drain neck (Fig. 156,1) or place appro-
priate container under the water drain neck.
Open the external flap (see section 7.2).
Open drain cock. The water will drain.
Close drain cock.
Close the external flap.
Replace the cap and lock it by turning it a quarter turn in an anticlockwise
direction.
Fig. 155 Water tank drain cock Fig. 156 Water drain neck
When filling the water tank, observe the maximum permissible gross
weight of the vehicle. Luggage must be reduced accordingly when the
water tank is full.
148 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Sanitary fittings
11
11.3 Waste water tank
Depending on the model, the drain cock (Fig. 157,1) is installed in the double
floor on either the left or right side of the vehicle. The drain cock can be
accessed via the rear garage. The drain cock is labelled by the word
"Abwasser" (waste water).
A cap (Fig. 158,2) closes the waste water drain neck (Fig. 158,1).
A hose line can be connected to the waste water drain neck (Fig. 158,1).
Emptying:
Unlock and remove the cap (Fig. 158,2) from the waste water drain neck
(Fig. 158,1) by turning it a quarter turn in a clockwise direction.
Mount suitable hose to the waste water drain neck or place appropriate
container under the waste water drain neck.
Open the external flap (see section 7.2).
Open drain cock (Fig. 157,1). The waste water will run out.
Close drain cock.
Close the external flap.
Replace the cap and lock it by turning it a quarter turn in an anticlockwise
direction.
In case of frost add so much anti-freeze (such as kitchen salt) to the waste
water tank so that the waste water cannot freeze.
If the living area heater is out of order, the waste water tank no longer is
sufficiently protected against frost.
Never pour boiling water directly into the sink outlet. Boiling water could
cause deformation and leaks in the waste water pipe system.
Only empty the waste water tank at disposal stations, camping sites or car-
avan sites especially provided for this purpose.
Fig. 157 Drain cock for waste water tank Fig. 158 Waste water drain neck
149Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Sanitary fittings
11
11.4 Odour seal
In order to prevent odours occurring in the waste water system, the vehicle -
depending on the model - has been equipped with odour seals (Fig. 159,1).
The odour seals are installed in the waste water pipes.
Clean the odour seals every two years at the latest. To do so, unscrew and
remove the bottom cover (Fig. 159,2).
11.5 Filling the water system
Position the vehicle horizontally.
Switch on 12 V power supply on the panel.
Switch on water pump on panel.
Clean or disinfect water system.
Close all drain cocks (Fig. 160,1 and Fig. 161,1 and 2). To do this, set the
rocking levers in a horizontal position.
Fig. 159 Odour seal
When filling the water tank, observe the maximum permissible gross
weight of the vehicle. Luggage must be reduced accordingly when the
water tank is full.
The water pump will overheat without water and can get damaged. Never
operate water pump when the water tank is empty.
The water system has several drain cocks (yellow) for emptying.
The water quantity can be monitored on the panel while the water tank is
filled.
Fig. 160 Drain cock on heater Fig. 161 Drain cock on water pump
150 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Sanitary fittings
11
Close all water taps.
Fill the water tank with drinking water.
Set all the water taps to "Hot" and open them. The water pump is turned
on. The warm water pipes are filled with water.
Keep the taps open until the water flowing out of the taps has no bubbles
in it. This is the only way to ensure that the boiler is full of water.
Set all water taps to "Cold" and leave them open. This will fill the cold water
pipes with water.
Keep the taps open until the water flowing out of the taps has no bubbles
in it.
Close all water taps.
11.6 Emptying the water system
To empty and ventilate the water system, proceed as follows. This prevents
frost damage and deposits:
Position the vehicle horizontally.
Switch off water pump on panel.
Switch off the 12 V power supply on the panel.
Shut off the boiler (see section 10.4).
Open all drain cocks (Fig. 160,1 and Fig. 161,1 and 2). To do this, set the
rocking lever in a vertical position.
Unscrew the cap of the water tank.
Remove the cap from the waste water drain neck and open the drain cock.
Open all water taps and set to the central position.
Hang the shower handset up in the shower position.
Check whether the water tank is completely empty.
Empty the waste water tank. Take note of the environmental tips in this
chapter.
Empty Thetford cassette. Take note of the environmental tips in this
chapter.
Clean the water tank and then rinse it out thoroughly.
Let the water system dry for as long as possible.
After emptying, leave all water taps on in the central position.
Leave all drain cocks open.
If the vehicle is not used for several days or if it is not heated when there is
a risk of frost, empty the entire water system. Leave the water taps on in
central position. Leave the safety/drainage valve (if there is one) and all
drain cocks open. Frost damage to appliances, frost damage to the vehicle
and deposits in water-carrying components can be avoided in this way.
Always switch off the water pump on the panel when emptying the water
system. Otherwise the water pump runs until it overheats or the battery is
empty.
The water system has several drain cocks (yellow) for emptying.
151Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Sanitary fittings
11
11.7 Toilet compartment
The switches for the toilet compartment lighting are installed in different places
in the toilet compartment depending on the model.
For example, the light switch (Fig. 162,1) of the toilet compartment is located
under the bathroom cabinet.
11.8 Toilet
Do not transport any loads in the shower tray. The shower tray or other
items of equipment in the toilet compartment can be damaged.
For ventilation purposes during or after a shower, and for drying wet
clothing, close the toilet compartment door and open the window or the
toilet compartment skylight. This improves the air circulation.
Close the shower curtain completely when showering, so that no water is
able to enter the area between the wash room wall and the shower tray.
After taking a shower, rinse soap residue from the shower tray, otherwise
cracks can appear in the shower tray over time.
After using the shower, wipe it dry to prevent moisture from collecting.
Further information about cleaning the toilet compartment can be found in
the section 12.2.
Fig. 162 Light switch
If there is any risk of frost and the vehicle is not heated, empty the sewage
tank (cassette).
Do not sit on the lid of the toilet. The lid is not designed to bear the weight
of a person and could break.
Use a suitable chemical for this toilet. The ventilation will merely remove
the odour but not germs and gases. Germs and gases will have a detri-
mental effect on the sealing rubbers.
Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction
manual.
Only empty the sewage tank (cassette) at disposal stations, at camping
sites or caravan sites, that are especially provided for this purpose.
152 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Sanitary fittings
11
11.8.1 Swivel toilet
The flushing of the Thetford toilet is fed directly from the water system of the
vehicle. The toilet bowl can be moved into the optimal position.
The operating unit is located close to the toilet bowl.
Flushing:
Before flushing open the sliding trap of the Thetford toilet. To do this, push
the slide lever (Fig. 163,1 or Fig. 164,1) in an anticlockwise direction.
For flushing, press the blue flush button (Fig. 165,1 or Fig. 166,1).
After flushing close the sliding trap. To do this push the slide lever in a
clockwise direction.
The indicator lamp (Fig. 165,2 or Fig. 166,2) goes on whenever the Thetford
cassette has to be emptied.
Emptying:
Turn the slide lever (Fig. 163,1 or Fig. 164,1) in a clockwise direction. The
sliding trap is closed. To empty, the sliding trap in the Thetford toilet must
be closed.
Remove the Thetford cassette and empty it as described in sections 11.8.3
and 11.8.4.
11.8.2 Vacuum toilet (Dometic)
The flushing of the toilet is fed directly from the water system of the vehicle.
Fig. 163 Thetford toilet bowl, swivelling Fig. 164 Thetford toilet bowl, swivelling
(alternative)
Fig. 165 Flush button/indicator lamp
Thetford toilet
Fig. 166 Flush button/indicator lamp
Thetford toilet (alternative)
Only flush the toilet if the toilet lid is closed.
153Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Sanitary fittings
11
Putting into operation: Turn on power supply. The yellow LED (Fig. 168,1) on the panel
(Fig. 167,1) turns on for ca. 1 minute. A vacuum is generated in the system.
If the green LED (Fig. 168,3) on the panel lights up, lift the pedal
(Fig. 167,3) briefly, so that some water runs into the toilet bowl (Fig. 167,2)
and the stopper on the bottom is covered with water.
The vacuum toilet is ready for operation.
Flushing:
Close the lid of the toilet.
Press down the pedal (Fig. 167,3) for several seconds.
Briefly lift the pedal, so that some water runs into the toilet bowl (Fig. 167,2)
and the stopper on the bottom is covered with water.
The red LED (Fig. 168,2) lights up if the cassette must be emptied or removed.
Removing the cassette:
Remove the cassette and empty it as described in sections 11.8.3 and
11.8.4.
11.8.3 Removing the cassette
Open the flap for the cassette on the outside of the vehicle. Insert the key
into the locking cylinder of the push-button lock (Fig. 169,1) and turn a
quarter turn.
Remove the key.
Fig. 167 Vacuum toilet Fig. 168 Vacuum toilet panel
Flushing only functions if the green LED is lit.
The sewage tank (cassette) can only be taken out if the sliding trap is
closed.
Fig. 169 Flap for the toilet cassette Fig. 170 Thetford cassette
154 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Sanitary fittings
11
Press both push-button locks (Fig. 169,2) simultaneously with your thumb
and open the flap for the cassette.
Press the release (Fig. 170,1) and pull out the toilet cassette on the handle
(Fig. 170,2).
11.8.4 Emptying the cassette
Take the cassette to a disposal point especially provided for this purpose.
As you do this, point the drainage neck upwards.
If possible, turn the drainage neck upwards.
Remove the cap of the drainage neck.
Point the cassette with the drainage neck downwards.
For Thetford cassettes: Activate the aeration knob with your thumb. The
cassette empties.
Close drainage neck with the cap.
If the drainage neck has been turned upwards: Return the drainage neck
to its original position.
Push the cassette back to its original position.
Ensure that the cassette is secured by the retaining clip.
Lock the flap for the cassette.
Fig. 171 Emptying the Thetford cas-
sette
155Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Care
12
12Care
Chapter overview
This chapter contains instructions regarding the care of the vehicle.
The instructions address the following topics:
exterior of the vehicle
interior
water system
extractor hood
toilets
winter operation
At the end of the chapter there is a checklist of measures you must carry out
if you are not going to use the vehicle for an extended period of time.
The checklist address the following topics:
temporary lay-up
winter lay-up
start-up after a lay-up
12.1 External care
12.1.1 Washing with a high-pressure cleaner
Before cleaning the vehicle with a high-pressure cleaner, observe the oper-
ating instructions of the high-pressure cleaner.
When cleaning with the nozzle for circular jet between the vehicle and the
cleaning nozzle, maintain a minimum distance of approx. 700 mm.
Take into consideration that the jet of water comes out of the cleaning nozzle
with pressure. The vehicle may be damaged by incorrect handling of the high-
pressure cleaner. The temperature of the water should not be above 60 °C.
Keep the jet of water in constant movement during the washing process. Do
not direct the water jet at clearances, built-in electrical parts, plugs, seals, the
ventilation grill or the skylights. The vehicle may be damaged or water may
enter the interior.
12.1.2 Washing the vehicle
Wash the vehicle only on a washing site intended for this purpose.
Avoid full sunshine. Observe environmental measures.
Only clean external applications and synthetic parts with plenty of warm
water, dish washing liquid and soft cloth.
Wash down the vehicle with plenty of water, a clean sponge or a soft brush.
In the case of stubborn dirt add dish washing liquid to the water.
Painted exterior walls may also be cleaned with a caravan cleaner.
Do not clean the tyres with a high-pressure cleaner. The tyres might be
damaged.
Do not spray external applications (deco-films) directly with the high-pres-
sure cleaner. The external applications could come off.
Never clean the vehicle in the car wash. Water can enter the refrigerator
grills, the waste gas vents, the ventilation of the extractor hoods or the
forced ventilations. The vehicle could be damaged.
156 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Care
12
Add-on parts made of glass-fibre reinforced plastic (GRP) require a regular
follow-up treatment with a polisher. This way these parts will not turn yellow
and the sealing of the surface remains intact.
Treat rubber seals of doors and storage flaps with talc.
Treat locking cylinder of doors and storage flaps with graphite dust.
12.1.3 Windows of acrylic glass
Acrylic glass windows are delicate and require very careful handling.
12.1.4 Underbody
The underbody of the vehicle is partly coated with an age-resistant underbody
protection. Should the underbody protection be damaged, repair immediately.
Do not treat areas coated with underbody protection with spray oil.
12.1.5 Waste water tank
Clean the waste water tank after every use of the vehicle.
Cleaning:
Empty the waste water tank.
Thoroughly rinse out the waste water tank with fresh water.
If possible, clean waste water sensors through the cleaning opening by
hand.
12.1.6 Entrance step
If the entrance step is lubricated, coarse particles of dirt can settle on the lubri-
cant during the journey and cause damage to the operating mechanism of the
entrance step. Therefore, do not lubricate the moving parts of the entrance
step.
Never rub acrylic glass windows dry as dust particles might damage the
surface!
Only clean acrylic glass windows with plenty of warm water, some dish
washing liquid and a soft cloth.
Never use glass cleaning agents with chemical, abrasive or alcohol-con-
taining additives. Premature brittleness of the panes and associated cracks
may result from their use.
Avoid contact of cleansing agents used for the body (e.g. tar- or silicone-
removing agents) with acrylic glass.
Do not clean vehicle in car wash.
Do not attach stickers to the acrylic glass windows.
Having cleaned the vehicle rinse acrylic glass with sufficient clear water.
Treat rubber seals with glycerin.
An acrylic glass cleanser with antistatic effect is suitable for a follow-up
treatment. Small scratches can be treated with an acrylic glass polish.
These agents are available at the accessories shop.
Only use products approved by the manufacturer. Our authorised dealers
and service centres will be happy to advise you.
157Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Care
12
12.1.7 Driver's cabin insulation mat (model I)
Clean the insulation mat for the driver's cabin with clear, lukewarm water.
Remove heavier soiling with a cloth and some white spirits. Afterwards, imme-
diately rinse the cleaned area with lukewarm water.
12.1.8 Electrical-hydraulic steady legs
Cleaning: Clean the steady legs regularly. Dirt and other contamination can impair its
functioning.
Spraying:
If the steady legs are to remain extended for any length of time, spray sili-
cone spray onto the lifting cylinder once per week. In a salty environment,
reduce that interval to two or three days.
Spray the outside of the entire steady legs with an anti-rust agent (e.g.
Tectyl) once annually. This protects the steady legs against corrosion and
rust.
12.2 Interior care
Surface and knobs of furniture, lamps and synthetic parts in the toilet and
living area should be cleaned with water and a wool cloth. A mild cleanser
may be added to the water. If required, use furniture polish for the painted
surfaces.
Clean upholstery with dry foam specially manufactured for the use on
upholstery or with the foam of a mild detergent. Do not wash upholstery.
Always have it cleaned. Protect upholstery from direct sunlight so that it
does not loose its colour.
If possible, treat stains immediately.
Acrylic glass windows are delicate and require very careful handling (see
section 12.1.3).
Synthetic parts in the toilet and living area are very delicate and should be
treated with care. Do not use solvents, alcohol-containing cleansers or
scourers containing sand. This procedure will help you to avoid brittleness
and formation of cracks.
Do not pour any corrosive agents into the drain holes. Never pour boiling
water directly into the drain holes. Corrosive agents and boiling water
cause damage to drainage pipes and siphon traps.
Do not use vinegar based products to clean the toilet and water system, or
for decalcification of the water system. Vinegar-based products may cause
damage to seals or parts of the installation. Use standard decalcifying
products for decalcification.
Save water. Mop up all remaining water.
Vacuum off carpets and cushions with a suitable brush attachment.
For information about the use of maintenance products, our representa-
tives and service centres will be glad to advise.
158 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Care
12
Clean the imitation leather coverings by wiping them off in circular motion
with a soft cloth or sponge and a mixture of lukewarm water and mild lather.
Treat stubborn stains with a soft brush. For very hard-to-remove stains, use
a mixture of alcohol and water mixed in a 1:1 ratio. Afterwards, wipe it off
with soap water. Do not use any products that contain solvents or abra-
sives.
Wipe off Teflon coverings with an absorbent cloth or sponge and use a mild
household detergent.
Never rub wet or oily stains. Instead, dab them with an absorbent cloth.
Work from the outside to the inside to prevent spreading the stain.
When treating solid or dried stains, always try to scrape them off with a dull
knife or scraper or remove them off with a soft brush. Afterwards, dab off
any residue with a moist cloth.
Curtains and net curtains should be dry cleaned.
Vacuum clean the carpet, if necessary clean with carpet shampoo.
Clean PVC-floor covering with a mild, soapy cleanser for PVC floors. Do
not place carpet on wet PVC-floor covering. The carpet and the PVC-floor
covering may stick together.
Never clean the sink or the gas cooker with a scourer. Avoid anything which
may cause scratching or grooves.
Clean gas cooker only with a moist cloth. Prevent any water from pene-
trating the gas cooker. Water may damage the gas cooker.
Brush insect screens on doors, windows and skylights with a soft brush or
vacuum with the brush attachment of the vacuum cleaner.
Brush blinds with a soft brush or vacuum with the brush attachment of the
vacuum cleaner. Grease or stubborn dirt may be removed with a mild soap
at 30 °C (curd soap).
Brush Roman shades with a soft brush or vacuum with the brush attach-
ment of the vacuum cleaner. Grease or stubborn dirt may be removed with
a mild soap at 30 °C (curd soap).
Unrolled seat belts can be cleaned with warm soapsuds. The seat belt
must be completely dry before being rolled up.
12.3 Water system
12.3.1 Cleaning the water tank
Empty the water tank and close the drainage opening.
Remove the cap of the water tank.
Fill water tank with water and some washing-up liquid (do not use any
scourers).
Using a trade standard brush for washing dishes, scrub the water tank until
there is no longer any visible deposit.
Scrub also the pump housing.
If possible, clean fresh water sensors through the cleaning openings by
hand.
Rinse water tank with copious amounts of drinking water.
159Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Care
12
12.3.2 Cleaning the water pipes
Empty the water system.
Close all drain holes and drain cocks.
Fill mixture of water and cleaning agent into the water tank. Observe the
manufacturer's instructions regarding the mixing ratio.
Open the drain cocks one by one.
Leave the drain cocks open until the mixture of water and cleaning agent
has reached the respective drain.
Close the drain cocks.
Set all the water taps to "Hot" and open them.
Leave the water taps open until the mixture of water and cleaning agent
has reached the drain.
Set all water taps to "Cold" and open them.
Leave the water taps open until the mixture of water and cleaning agent
has reached the drain.
Close all water taps.
Flush the toilet several times.
Allow the cleaning agent to act in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
Empty the water system. Collect the mixture of water and cleaning agent
for correct disposal.
For rinsing fill the entire water system with drinking water and empty again
several times over.
12.3.3 Disinfecting the water system
Empty the water system.
Close all drain holes and drain cocks.
Fill mixture of water and disinfectant into the water tank. Observe the man-
ufacturer's instructions regarding the mixing ratio.
Open the drain cocks one by one.
Leave the drain cocks open until the mixture of water and disinfectant has
reached the respective drain.
Close the drain cocks.
Only use suitable cleaning agents as sold by the specialist trade.
Collect any emerging mixture of water and cleaning agent for correct dis-
posal.
Only use suitable disinfectants as sold by the specialist trade.
Collect any emerging mixture of water and disinfectant for correct disposal.
160 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Care
12
Set all the water taps to "Hot" and open them.
Leave the water taps open until the mixture of water and disinfectant has
reached the drain.
Set all water taps to "Cold" and open them.
Leave the water taps open until the mixture of water and disinfectant has
reached the drain.
Close all water taps.
Flush the toilet several times.
Allow the disinfectant to act in accordance with the manufacturer's instruc-
tions.
Empty the water system. Collect the mixture of water and disinfectant for
correct disposal.
For rinsing fill the entire water system with drinking water and empty again
several times over.
12.4 Extractor hood
Clean the extractor hood filter occasionally. How often cleaning is necessary
depends on how often the extractor hood is used. Do not wait to clean the filter
until the performance of the extractor hood has noticeably decreased.
Cleaning the filter:
Pull down the filter (Fig. 172,2) with the handle (Fig. 172,1).
Wash the filter with warm water and some washing-up liquid.
Let the filter dry completely and re-install.
12.5 Vacuum toilet (Dometic)
If the toilet will not be used for a longer period of time, for example for Winter
lay up, the toilet must be cleaned and completely emptied.
Prior to carrying out work on the device, turn off the power supply.
Fig. 172 Extractor hood
161Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Care
12
Emptying valve: Empty the entire water system.
Press the toilet pedal several times, until no more water flows.
Empty the cassette at a disposal station authorized for this purpose and
clean it.
Turn off power supply.
Remove cover (Fig. 173,3).
Unscrew the cap (Fig. 173,2).
Place a suitable container under the valve (Fig. 173,1).
Press the pedal several times until water no longer comes out of the valve.
Screw the cap back on and attach cover.
12.6 Winter care
De-icing salt damages the underbody and the parts open to water spray. We
recommend that you wash the vehicle more frequently during wintertime.
Mechanical and surface treated parts and the underside are under particular
strain, and should therefore be cleaned thoroughly.
12.6.1 Preparations
Check the vehicle for paint and rust damage. Repair damage as neces-
sary.
Make certain that water cannot penetrate the automatic floor ventilation
system and the heater.
Use a wax-based rust inhibitor to protect the metal parts of the underbody.
Use appropriate protection for external painted surfaces.
Fig. 173 Vacuum toilet valve
If there is any risk of frost, always run heater at a minimum of 15 °C. Switch
the circulation fan (if there is one) to automatic. In the case of extreme
external temperatures, the furniture flaps and doors should be left slightly
open. The inflowing warm air can help prevent the freezing of water pipes,
for example, and counteract the formation of condensation in the storage
spaces.
If there is any risk of frost, cover the outside surface of the windows with
winter insulation mats.
162 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Care
12
12.6.2 Winter operation
During winter operation, condensation develops when the vehicle is occupied
under low-temperature conditions. To ensure good interior air quality and
avoid vehicle damage from condensation, sufficient ventilation is essential.
When heating the vehicle, the heater should be at the highest setting and
roof storage cabinets, curtains and blinds should be opened. This ensures
optimal ventilation.
In the morning, lift up all cushions, air out storage boxes and dry any damp
areas.
12.6.3 At the end of the winter season
Thoroughly clean the underbody of the vehicle and the engine. When this
is done, corrosion-inducing anti-freeze agents (salts, alkaline residues) are
removed.
Clean the exterior and use regular car wax to protect metal surfaces.
12.7 Lay-up
12.7.1 Temporary lay-up
Animals (especially mice) can cause great damage to the interior of the
vehicle. This is especially true if the animal remains undisturbed in a parked
vehicle.
The animals can get into the vehicle at an opportune moment and hide from
view.
To keep damages from animals to a minimum or to avoid them altogether, reg-
ularly check the vehicle for damage or animal traces. This is especially impor-
tant approx. 24 hours after parking the car in storage.
If animal traces are found, contact your authorised dealer or service centre. If
damage to cables has occurred, they can result in short circuits. The vehicle
could catch fire.
Before laying up the vehicle, go through the following checklist:
If condensation has still developed, just wipe it off.
If the vehicle has been stationary for a long period (approx. 10 months)
have the braking and gas systems checked by an authorised specialist
workshop.
Take into consideration that water is undrinkable after only a short time.
Animal damage to cables can lead to short circuits. Fire hazard!
163Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Care
12
Activities Done
Base vehicle
Completely fill fuel tank. This prevents corrosion damage within the
fuel tank system
Jack up vehicle so that the wheels do not bear any load, or move ve-
hicle every 4 weeks. This prevents any pressure points from occur-
ring on tyres and wheel bearings
Protect the tyres from direct exposure to the sun. Danger of forma-
tion of cracks!
Inflate tyres up to the recommended maximum pressure
Always provide for sufficient ventilation in the underbody area
Humidity or lack of oxygen e.g. by covering with plastic film
may cause optical irregularities to the underbody.
In addition observe the notes in the operating manual of the base ve-
hicle
Body
All vents should be sealed with the appropriate caps and all other
openings (apart from forced ventilations) should also be sealed. This
prevents animals (e.g. mice) from gaining entry
Air the interior, all storage compartments accessible from the out-
side, and the parking space (e.g. garage) every 3 weeks in order to
prevent the occurrence of condensation and resulting mould forma-
tion
Interior
Place upholstery in an upright position for ventilation, and cover
Clean refrigerator
Allow refrigerator and freezer compartment doors to remain slightly
open
Search for traces of animals that have gained entry
Disconnect the flat screen from the mains and, if necessary, remove
it from the vehicle
Gas system
Close regulator tap on the gas bottle
Close all gas isolator taps
Always remove gas bottles from the gas bottle compartment, even if
they are empty
Electrical system
Fully charge living area and starter battery
Charge the battery for at least 20 hours before laying up.
Disconnect the living area battery from the 12 V power supply on the
panel
Water system
Empty the entire water system. Blow out the residual water from the
water pipes (0.5 bar max.). Leave the water taps on in central posi-
tion. Leave the safety/drainage valve (if there is one) and all drain
cocks open. Observe the notes in chapter 11
164 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Care
12
12.7.2 Winter lay-up
Additional measures are required if laying up the vehicle over winter:
Activities Done
Base vehicle
Clean body and underbody thoroughly and spray with hot wax or
protect with varnish
Fill fuel tank with winter diesel
Check antifreeze in the cooling water
Rectify damage to the paintwork
Body
Keep the forced ventilation open
Clean and lubricate the mounted steady legs
Clean and grease all door and flap hinges
Brush oil or glycerine on all locking mechanisms
Rub all rubber seals with talc
Use graphite dust to treat locking cylinders
Interior
Position de-humidifiers
Remove upholstery from the vehicle and store in a dry place
Air the interior every 3 weeks
Empty all cabinets and storage compartments, open flaps, doors and
drawers
Thoroughly clean the interior
If there is a risk of frost, do not leave the flat screen in the vehicle
Electrical system
Remove starter and living area batteries and store in a place protect-
ed from frost (see chapter 9)
Water system
Clean the water system using a cleaning agent from a specialised
store
Complete vehicle
Arrange the tarpaulins in such a way that the ventilation openings
are not covered, or use porous tarpaulins
165Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Care
12
12.7.3 Starting up the vehicle after a temporary lay-up or after lay-
up over winter
Go through the following checklist before start-up:
Activities Done
Base vehicle
Check the tyre pressure on all tyres
Check the tyre pressure of the spare wheel
Body
Clean the pivot bearing of the entrance step
Check the functioning of the fitted steady legs
Check that the doors, windows and skylights are working properly
Check the function of all external locks
Remove the cover from the waste gas vent of the heater (if there is
one)
Remove the winter cover from the refrigerator grills (if there is one)
Gas system
Put the gas bottles in the gas bottle compartment, tie down and con-
nect to the gas pressure regulator
Electrical system
Connect to 240 V power supply using the external socket
Fully charge living area and starter battery
Charge the battery for at least 20 hours after lay-up.
Connect the living area battery with the 12 V power supply via the
panel
Check that the electrical system are working, e.g. interior light, sock-
et and all installed electrical appliances
Water system
Disinfect water pipes and water tank
Check the functionality of the operating lever for the waste water
tank
Close all drain cocks and water taps
Check the water taps, drain cocks and water distributors for leaks
Appliances
Check the function of the refrigerator
Change heating fluid of the hot-water heater every 2 years
Check the function of the heater/boiler
Check the function of the gas cooker
Check the function of the air conditioning unit
166 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Care
12
167Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Maintenance
13
13Maintenance
Chapter overview
This chapter contains instructions about inspection and maintenance work
concerning the vehicle.
The maintenance instructions address the following topics:
electrical-hydraulic steady legs
Alde hot-water heater
independent vehicle heater
air conditioning unit
vacuum cleaner
replacing bulbs and fluorescent tubes
At the end of the chapter you will find important instructions on how to obtain
spare parts.
13.1 Inspection work
Like any technical appliance, the vehicle must be inspected at regular inter-
vals.
This inspection work must be carried out by qualified personnel.
Special technical knowledge, which cannot be taught within the framework of
this instruction manual, is required for these tasks. Personnel with this tech-
nical knowledge are available for assistance at all authorised dealers and
service centres. Their experience and regular technical instruction by the fac-
tory as well as equipment and tools guarantee expert and up-to-date inspec-
tion of the vehicle.
The service centre in charge will confirm the work performed.
Have chassis inspections confirmed in the chassis manufacturer's customer
service booklet.
13.2 Maintenance work
As with every machine, this vehicle requires maintenance. The extent and fre-
quency of the maintenance work required depend on conditions of operation
and use. More difficult operating conditions make it necessary to service the
vehicle more often.
Have the base vehicle and the appliances serviced at the intervals specified
in the corresponding instruction manuals.
Observe the inspections indicated by the manufacturer and have them car-
ried out at the specified intervals. The value of the vehicle is thus pre-
served.
The confirmation of the inspection work carried out serves as valid proof in
the event of damage and guarantee claims.
168 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Maintenance
13
13.3 Electrical-hydraulic steady legs
Check the system's oil level at least once per month with the steady legs fully
retracted.
The filling level must be approximately two to four centimetres below the filler
opening.
13.4 Alde hot-water heater
13.4.1 Checking the fluid level
Switch off the hot-water heater and allow it to cool down.
Check if the fluid level is between the marks "MIN" (Fig. 174,3) and "MAX"
(Fig. 174,2) on the compensator reservoir (Fig. 174).
Have the oil changed every 3 years by your authorised dealer or the service
centre.
If oil needs to be topped up, use only oils specified by the manufacturer.
Refer to the manufacturer's separate instruction manual for information, or
ask your authorised dealer or the service centre.
Check the level of the heating fluid regularly on the compensator reservoir.
During or after the first operating hours of the hot-water heater, the filling
level may fall below the minimum mark. If this is the case, top up the
heating fluid.
We recommend to bleed the heating system after the initial heater opera-
tion and to check the glycol content.
Have heating fluid changed by an authorised dealer or a service centre at
intervals of approximately two years as corrosion-protection wears off after
some time.
Top up heating system with a water-glycol mixture (60 : 40) only. This mix-
ture offers frost protection up to approx. -25 °C. When topping up hot-water
heaters that are connected to the engine's cooling circuit, please observe
the instructions in the instruction manuals of the manufacturers.
Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction
manual.
Fig. 174 Compensator reservoir hot-
water heater
169Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Maintenance
13
13.4.2 Topping up heating fluid
Position the vehicle horizontally. This prevents the formation of bubbles.
Switch off the hot-water heater and allow it to cool down.
Unscrew or pull off the panel.
Open the rotary lid (Fig. 174,1) on the compensator reservoir.
Slowly remove cover with circulating pump upwards.
Check anti-freeze with an anti-freeze hydrometer. The frost protection con-
tent must be 40 % or correspond to a frost protection of -25 °C.
Fill water frost protection mixture slowly into the compensator reservoir.
13.4.3 Bleeding the heating system
The bleeding valves are built in nearby the radiators. Depending on the model,
the bleeding valve may be concealed under a cover (Fig. 176,1) in the dash-
board.
Switch off the hot-water heater and allow it to cool down.
Open bleeding valve (Fig. 175,1) and leave open until no more air escapes.
Close bleeding valve.
Repeat this procedure at all bleeding valves.
Check to see if the hot-water heater warms up.
13.5 Independent vehicle heater
Use the independent vehicle heater for 10 minutes at least once a month with
a cold engine and smallest fan settings.
Before the heating season starts, have the independent vehicle heater
checked by an authorised specialist workshop.
13.6 Air conditioning unit (Truma)
The optimum fluid level is reached when the fluid in the compensator res-
ervoir is 1 cm above the "MIN" mark.
Fig. 175 Bleeding valve of hot-water
heater
Fig. 176 Cover in the dashboard
Prior to carrying out work on the device, turn off the power supply.
170 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Maintenance
13
The air conditioning unit is installed in the double floor on the right side of the
vehicle. The lint filter can be accessed via a flap in the rear garage.
A lint filter (Fig. 177,1) for the air circulation suction system is at the front of the
air conditioning unit. The lint filter must be cleaned at regular intervals, at least
twice a year however, and replaced if necessary.
The condensation drain is under the floor of the vehicle. Keep the drain hose
free from dirt, leaves or similar to allow the condensation to be drained.
13.7 Central vacuum cleaner
Changing the motor filter: Press the unlocking device (Fig. 178,1) upwards.
Open the flap (Fig. 178,2).
Carefully remove the dust bag.
Reach into the vacuum cleaner and pull out the motor filter (Fig. 178,3).
Never operate the air conditioning unit without a lint filter. Without a lint
filter, the vaporiser becomes dirty and the capacity of the air conditioning
unit is consequently impaired.
Condensation can enter the vehicle if the condensation drain is clogged up.
Keep the condensation drain free from dirt, leaves and similar.
Fig. 177 Air conditioning unit
Prior to carrying out work on the device, turn off the power supply.
Never operate the vacuum cleaner without a filter. Dirt can enter the motor
and impair its performance.
Fig. 178 Vacuum cleaner Fig. 179 Blow-out filter
171Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Maintenance
13
Insert a new motor filter or wash out the motor filter manually, allow it to dry
and put it back in.
Align the motor filter. The sides of the motor filter must be underneath the
vertical ribs all round.
Insert the dust bag.
Close flap.
Changing the blow-out filter:
Reach into the centre of the blow-out opening (Fig. 178,4).
Pull out the blow-out filter (Fig. 179,1).
Push the new blow-out filter outwards to the left from the centre, and then
push it to the right (Fig. 179).
13.8 Replacing bulbs and fluorescent tubes
13.8.1 Halogen spotlight (movable)
Changing bulbs: Loosen the fixing screws (Fig. 180,1).
Carefully remove the lamp chalice (Fig. 180,2) from the holder.
Remove halogen bulb.
Put in a new halogen bulb.
Reassemble the lamp in the reverse order.
Bulbs and light fittings can be extremely hot. Therefore, allow lights to
cool down before changing bulbs.
Shut off the power supply on the safety cut-out in the 240 V fuse box
before changing bulbs.
Store bulbs in a safe place inaccessible to children.
Do not use any bulb that has been dropped or which shows scratches in
its glass. The bulb might burst.
Lights can get very hot. When the light is switched on, there must always
be a safety distance of 30 cm between light and flammable objects. Fire
hazard!
A new bulb should not be touched with the fingers. Use a cloth when
installing the new bulb.
Only use bulbs of the same type and with the correct wattage.
If LEDs in lights are defect, contact an authorised dealer or service centre.
Fig. 180 Halogen spotlight (movable)
172 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Maintenance
13
13.8.2 Room lamp
Changing bulbs: Unscrew the cap (Fig. 181,1).
Remove cover (Fig. 181,2).
Press the light covering (Fig. 181,3) lightly together and remove it.
Remove the fluorescent tube.
Insert a new fluorescent tube.
Reassemble the lamp in the reverse order.
13.8.3 Recessed halogen light with housing
The recessed halogen light is installed flush in a housing (Fig. 182,1).
Changing bulbs:
Use a screwdriver to remove the inner cover ring (Fig. 182,3) from the
housing.
Remove the cover ring with the glass.
Remove halogen bulb (Fig. 182,2).
Put in a new halogen bulb.
Reassemble the lamp in the reverse order.
Fig. 181 Room lamp
Fig. 182 Recessed halogen light
173Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Maintenance
13
13.8.4 Recessed halogen light (swivelling)
Changing bulbs: Use a suitable tool (e.g. a screwdriver) to lever out and remove the lamp
(Fig. 183,1).
Take the spotlight (Fig. 183,2) out of the lamp.
Remove cover (Fig. 183,3).
Remove halogen bulb.
Put in a new halogen bulb.
Reassemble the lamp in the reverse order.
13.8.5 Recessed halogen light (flat)
The recessed halogen light (Fig. 184,1) is installed flush.
Changing bulbs:
Use a screwdriver to remove the inner cover ring (Fig. 185,1) from the
housing.
Use a screwdriver to remove the cover ring with the glass (Fig. 185,2) from
the lower section of the recessed halogen light.
Remove halogen bulb (Fig. 185,3).
Put in a new halogen bulb.
Reassemble the lamp in the reverse order.
Fig. 183 Recessed halogen light (swiv-
elling)
Fig. 184 Recessed halogen light (flat) Fig. 185 Changing the halogen bulb
174 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Maintenance
13
13.8.6 Wardrobe light
Changing bulbs: Press the light covering (Fig. 186,1) lightly together and remove it.
Remove halogen bulb.
Put in a new halogen bulb.
Reassemble the lamp in the reverse order.
13.8.7 Garage light
Changing bulbs: Push the light covering (Fig. 187,1) up slightly and remove it.
Remove bulb.
Put in a new bulb.
Reassemble the lamp in the reverse order.
Fig. 186 Wardrobe light
Fig. 187 Garage light
175Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Maintenance
13
13.8.8 Refrigerator light
Changing bulbs: Switch off the refrigerator at the external switch.
Grip under the light covering (Fig. 188,1) from behind and raise the light
covering approximately 3 mm.
Remove the light covering to the side.
Remove bulb.
Put in a new bulb.
Reassemble the lamp in the reverse order.
13.9 Spare parts
For safety reasons, spare parts for pieces of equipment must correspond with
manufacturer's instructions and be permitted by the manufacturer as a spare
part. These spare parts may only be fitted by the manufacturer or an author-
ised specialist workshop. The authorised dealers and service centres are
available for any spare parts requirement.
Here are some suggestions of important spare parts:
Fuses
V-belt
Windscreen blades
Bulbs
When ordering spare parts, please indicate the serial number and the vehicle
type to the authorised dealer or service centre.
Fig. 188 Refrigerator light
Every alteration of the original condition of the vehicle can alter road
behaviour and jeopardize road safety.
The special equipment and original spare parts recommended by
Dethleffs have been specially developed and supplied for your vehicle.
These products are available at the authorised dealers or service cen-
tres. The authorised dealers and service centres are informed about
admissible technical details and carry out the required work correctly.
The use of accessories, parts and fittings not supplied by Dethleffs may
cause damage to the vehicle and jeopardize road safety. Even if an
expert's report, a general type approval or a design certification exists,
there is no guarantee for the proper quality of the product.
No liability can be assumed for damage caused by products which have
not been released by Dethleffs. This also applies to impermissible alter-
ations to the vehicle.
176 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Maintenance
13
The vehicle described in this instruction manual is built and equipped to factory
standards. Special equipment is offered depending on its purpose or use.
When fitting special equipment check if such equipment has to be entered in
the vehicle documents. Observe the max. permissible gross weight. The
authorised dealer or service centre will be happy to advise you.
13.10 Vehicle identification plate
The vehicle identification plate (Fig. 189) with the serial number is fitted on the
B column on the front passenger side (models T and A) or in the entrance area
(models I).
Do not remove the vehicle identification plate. The vehicle identification plate:
Identifies the vehicle
Helps with the procurement of spare parts
Together with the vehicle documents identifies the vehicle owner
13.11 Warning and information stickers
There are warning and information stickers on and inside the vehicle. Warning
and information stickers are for the sake of safety and must not be removed.
Fig. 189 Vehicle identification plate
1Type
2 Maximum permissible gross weight
of the vehicle with trailer
3 Manufacturer of the unit (add-on
unit)
4 Manufacturer's code and chassis
number
5 EG type approval number
6 Permissible rear axle load (for
tandem axle)
7 Permissible axle load rear
8 Permissible axle load front
9 Maximum permissible gross weight
of the vehicle
10 Serial number
Always include the serial number with all inquiries for the customer
service office.
Replacement stickers can be obtained from an authorised dealer or a
service centre.
177Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Wheels and tyres
14
14Wheels and tyres
Chapter overview
This chapter contains instructions regarding the tyres of the vehicle.
The instructions address the following topics:
tyre selection
handling of tyres
changing wheels
spare wheel support
tyre pressure
At the end of the chapter there is a table you can use to find the correct tyre
pressure for your vehicle.
14.1 General
Observe: Check the tyres regularly (every 2 weeks) for equal tread wear, tread depth
and external damage.
Replace tyres at the latest, when the minimum depth of tread stipulated by
law is reached.
Always use tyres of the same model, same brand and same style (summer
and winter tyres).
Only use tyres approved for the wheel rim type fitted. The permitted rim and
tyre sizes are quoted in the vehicle documents and the authorised dealer
or service centre will always be glad to give you advice.
Run-in new tyres for approx. 100 km (60 miles) at low speed since only
then do they reach full strength.
Check tyre pressure before a journey or every 2 weeks. Wrong tyre
pressure causes excessive wear and can lead to damage or even to tyre
burst. You can lose control of the vehicle.
Only check the tyre pressure on cold tyres.
Tubeless tyres have been installed on the vehicle. Never install tubes in
these tyres.
Read the instruction manual for the base vehicle.
Depending on the base vehicle and model the vehicles are equipped with
only one tyre repair kit as standard.
In the case of a puncture, pull over to the side of the road. Make vehicle
safe with a hazard warning triangle. Switch on the warning lights.
Tyres on vehicles with tandem axles may wear faster.
Tyres must not be older than 6 years as the material will become brittle
over time. The four-digit DOT number on the tyre flank indicates the date
of manufacture. The first two digits designate the week, the last two digits
the year of manufacture.
Example: Week 15, year of manufacture 2009.
178 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Wheels and tyres
14
Check regularly that the wheel nuts or wheel bolts are firmly seated. Re-
tighten the wheel nuts or wheel bolts of a changed wheel cross-wise
(Fig. 190) after 50 km (30 miles).
When using new or newly painted rims, re-tighten the wheel nuts or wheel
bolts once again after approx. 1,000 to 5,000 km (600 miles to
3,000 miles).
For lay-ups or long periods of inactivity, keep the tyres and tyre bearings
free from pressure points:
Jack up the vehicle so that the wheels do not bear any load, or move the
vehicle every 4 weeks in such a way that the position of the wheels is
changed.
14.2 Tyre selection
The tyre sizes approved for the vehicle are given in the vehicle documents or
can be obtained from the authorised dealers or service centres. Each tyre
must fit the vehicle on which it will be driven. This applies to the external
dimensions (diameter, width), which are indicated with the standardised size
designations. In addition, the tyres must meet the requirements of the vehicle
with regard to weight and speed.
Weight refers to the maximum permissible axle load which can be distributed
on two tyres. The maximum load-carrying capacity of a tyre is indicated by its
load index (= LI, load index code).
The axle geometry of a vehicle, such as wheel camber and track, is also
important for tyre selection. The maximum permissible speed for a tyre (with
full load-carrying capacity) is indicated by the speed index (= SI). Together,
load index and speed index form the operating code of a tyre. This is an official
component of the complete, standardised dimensions description which
appears on every tyre. The information on the tyres must correspond to the
specifications which appear in the vehicle papers.
Fig. 190 Tighten the wheel nuts or
wheel bolts cross-wise
A wrong tyre can damage the tyres during the journey and even cause
it to burst.
If tyres that are not approved for the vehicle are used, then the type
approval for the vehicle and subsequently the insurance coverage can
lapse. The authorised dealer or service centre will be happy to advise you.
179Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Wheels and tyres
14
14.3 Tyre specifications
14.4 Handling of tyres
Drive over kerbs at an obtuse angle. Otherwise the flanks of the tyres may
get pinched. Driving over a kerb at a sharp angle can damage the tyre and
result in it getting ruptured.
Drive over high manhole covers at a slow speed. Otherwise the tyres may
get pinched. Driving over a high manhole cover at high speed can damage
the tyre and result in it getting ruptured.
Check the shock absorbers regularly. Driving with poor shock absorbers
significantly increases wear.
If the tread wear is uneven, have the toe-in and the wheel camber checked.
Driving with an incorrectly set toe-in or a one-sided wheel camber leads to
a significant increase in wear.
Avoid block brakings. Block braking gives the tyres "brake plates" of var-
ying strength. This reduces driving comfort. It might even make the tyres
unserviceable.
Do not clean the tyres with a high-pressure cleaner. The tyres can suffer
serious damage within just a few seconds and rupture as a result.
Drive in such a way as to protect your tyres. Avoid braking sharply, revving
up too strongly and long journeys on poor roads.
14.5 Changing wheels
Description Explanation
215/70 R 15C 109/107 Q
215 Tyre width in mm
70 Height-to-width proportion in percent
R Tyre design (R = radial)
15 Rim diameter in inches
C Commercial (transporter)
109 Load index code for single tyres
107 Load index code for twin tyres
Q Speed index (Q = 160 km/h)
The vehicle must be on level, firm ground, secure from slipping.
Go into first gear. In the case of automatic transmission, change gear to
"P" position.
Before jacking up the vehicle firmly apply the handbrake.
Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by blocking the opposite wheel
with the wheel chocks.
Under no circumstances jack the vehicle with the fitted supports.
If a trailer is connected: Detach the trailer before lifting the vehicle.
Position the vehicle jack underneath the axle, not under any circum-
stances on the bodywork.
Never overload the vehicle jack. The maximum permissible load is spec-
ified on the vehicle jack's identification plate.
180 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Wheels and tyres
14
14.6 Spare wheel support
Removing the spare wheel: Pull out splint (Fig. 191,4).
Press the clip (Fig. 191,5) against the spare wheel and unhook the holder
(Fig. 191,3).
Move the clip down.
Undo nut (Fig. 191,2) and remove the spare wheel (Fig. 191,1).
Use the vehicle jack only for lifting the vehicle briefly while changing the
tyre.
Do not start the motor while the vehicle is jacked up.
Whilst the vehicle is in a jacked up position, persons must not lie down
under it.
Do not damage the thread of the thread bolts when changing the wheel.
Tighten the wheel nuts or wheel bolts cross-wise (Fig. 190).
When changing wheels (e.g. alloy wheel rims or wheels with winter tyres),
use the correct wheel bolts of the correct length and shape. The firm
seating of the wheels and the function of the braking system depend on
this.
Wheel rims and tyres not permitted for use with the vehicle can jeopardize
road safety.
Do not replace wheels cross-wise.
Protect the vehicle according to the national regulations, e.g. with a hazard
warning triangle.
Before changing the wheel, check the wheel rim and tyre size, the max. tyre
load and the speed index on the tyres. Only use the wheel rim and tyre
sizes stated in the vehicle documents.
Further information can be found in the instruction manual of the base
vehicle.
Due to its weight and fitted position, the spare wheel can be raised or
lowered by a very strong person only. Always get a second person to
assist.
Fig. 191 Spare wheel support (Iveco)
181Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Wheels and tyres
14
14.7 Tyre pressure
The payload and the durability of tyres is directly dependent on the tyre pres-
sure. Air is a volatile medium. It is unavoidable that it will escape from tyres.
As a rule of thumb it can be assumed that a filled tyre loses pressure at a rate
of 0.1 bar every two months. To prevent the tyres becoming damaged or burst,
check the tyre pressure regularly.
The vehicles are constantly brought up to the newest technical standards. It is
possible that new tyre sizes are not yet included in this table. If this is the case,
the Dethleffs dealer will be happy to provide the newest values.
Tyres overheat if the tyre pressure is too low. This can cause serious
tyre damage.
Check tyre pressure before a journey or every 2 weeks. Wrong tyre
pressure causes excessive wear and can lead to damage or even to tyre
burst. You can lose control of the vehicle.
Use only valves that are approved for the specified tyre pressure.
Only check the tyre pressure on cold tyres.
The information on pressure levels is valid for cold tyres and loaded vehi-
cles.
Pressure in hot tyres is higher than in cold tyres. Therefore, check the pres-
sure when the tyres are cold.
The kg values refer to the actual axle load.
Tyre pressures in bar.
The valve used must be approved for the air pressure. We recommend the
use of a metal valve for pressures greater than 4.75 bar.
For the maximum permissible axle loads for your vehicle please refer to
specific documentation.
Tyre pres-
sure
225/75 R 16 C
118/116 Q
225/75 R 16 C
121/120 Q
Front (kg) Rear (kg) Front (kg) Rear (kg)
3.0 1680 3190 – –
3.25 1790 3400 – –
3.5 1900 3610 – –
3.75 2010 3820 2060 3970
4.0 2120 4020 2160 4180
4.25 2220 4220 2270 4390
4.5 2330 4410 2380 4600
4.75 2430 4610 2480 4800
5.0 2530 4800 2590 5000
5.25 2640 5000 2690 5200
5.5 – – 2790 5400
5.75 – – 2900 5600
182 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Wheels and tyres
14
183Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Troubleshooting
15
15Troubleshooting
Chapter overview
This chapter contains instructions about possible faults in your vehicle.
The faults are listed with their possible causes and corresponding remedies.
The instructions address the following topics:
braking system
pneumatic spring
electrical-hydraulic steady legs
electrical system
light control
gas system
gas cooker
gas oven
microwave oven
heater
boiler
refrigerator
air conditioning unit
dishwasher
water supply
toilet
body
The specified faults can be remedied with relative ease and without a great
deal of specialised knowledge. In the event that the remedies detailed in this
instruction manual should not be successful, an authorised specialist work-
shop must find and eliminate the cause of the fault.
15.1 Braking system
15.2 Pneumatic spring
15.2.1 Pneumatic spring (Goldschmidt)
If one or both air circuits are without air pressure (air cushion or pressure
gauge damaged), only undertake the journey at a steady speed (max.
30 km/h) and only to the next garage (emergency running).
Have defects on the braking system immediately remedied by an author-
ised specialist workshop.
Have defects on the air suspension immediately remedied by an author-
ised specialist workshop.
Fault Cause Remedy
Compressor does not
start
Fuse is defective Replace fuse
Compressor motor over-
heated
Allow compressor motor
to cool down for approx.
30 minutes
Operating switch defec-
tive
Contact customer service
184 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Troubleshooting
15
15.2.2 Pneumatic spring (VB-airsuspension)
Thermal monitoring con-
tinuously responds
Ambient temperature is
too high
Provide more ventilation
Compressor is defective Contact customer service
Loud noises during oper-
ation
Screwed connections of
the supports loose
Check the screwed con-
nections and tighten if
necessary
Compressor is defective Contact customer service
Pressure drops sharply
during operation
Connections loose Tighten connections
System has a leak Contact customer service
Compressor does not
switch off
Connections loose Tighten connections
Compressor is defective Contact customer service
Operating switch defec-
tive
Contact customer service
Have defects on the air suspension immediately remedied by an author-
ised specialist workshop.
Fault Cause Remedy
Compressor not running Fuse is defective Replace fuse
Input voltage too low Charge the living area
battery
Vehicle is not lowered Fuse is defective Replace fuse
Vehicle is not raised,
even though the com-
pressor is running
No changeover between
manual and automatic
level control
Check the function
When the service func-
tion is activated ("SERV-
ICE" LED lights up):
Deactivate the service
function
When the service func-
tion is not activated: Con-
tact customer service
Fault Cause Remedy
185Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Troubleshooting
15
15.3 Electrical-hydraulic steady legs
15.4 Electrical system
Fault Cause Remedy
System does not work Ignition not switched on Switch on ignition
Handbrake not applied Apply the handbrake
Control unit switched off Press the On/Off switch
Steady legs do not ex-
tend
LED indicator for battery
lights up
Input voltage too low Charge the living area
battery
Steady legs do not ex-
tend completely, even
though the pump is run-
ning
Oil level too low Check the oil level and
top up oil if necessary
When the living area battery is changed, only use batteries of the same
type.
See chapter 9 for changing the fuses.
Fault Cause Remedy
Road light system does
no longer work correctly
Bulb is defective Unscrew cover of the rel-
evant light, replace bulb.
Note volts and watts
specifications
Fuse is defective Replace fuse
Interior lighting does not
work
Bulb is defective Unscrew cover of the rel-
evant light, replace bulb.
Note volts and watts
specifications
Fuse on the transformer/
rectifier is defective
Replace fuse on the
transformer/rectifier
The electrically operated
entrance step cannot be
moved in or out
Fuse on the transformer/
rectifier is defective
Replace fuse on the
transformer/rectifier
No 240 V power supply
despite connection
240 V automatic circuit
breaker has triggered
Switch on the 240 V au-
tomatic circuit breaker
Starter or living area bat-
tery is not charged when
operated in 240 V mode
Fuse on the starter bat-
tery or on the living area
battery faulty
Replace fuse on the
starter battery or on the
living area battery
Charger module in the
transformer/rectifier or
the auxiliary charging unit
is defective
Contact customer service
186 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Troubleshooting
15
Living area battery is not
charged during vehicle
operation
Fuse on terminal D+ of
the alternator is defective
Replace fuse
Disconnector relay in the
transformer/rectifier is
defective
Contact customer service
No display on the panel 12 V power supply
switched off
Switch 12 V power sup-
ply on
Living area battery dis-
connected from the 12 V
power supply
Connect the living area
battery with the 12 V
power supply
Starter or living area bat-
tery is not charged
Charge the starter or liv-
ing area battery
Disconnector relay in the
transformer/rectifier is
defective
Contact customer service
Flat fuse (2 A) in the liv-
ing area battery is defec-
tive
Replace flat fuse (2 A) in
the living area battery
12 V power supply does
not work
12 V power supply
switched off
Switch 12 V power sup-
ply on
Living area battery dis-
connected from the 12 V
power supply
Connect the living area
battery with the 12 V
power supply
Living area battery is dis-
charged
Charging the living area
battery
Fuse on the living area
battery is defective
Replace fuse on the liv-
ing area battery
Disconnector relay in the
transformer/rectifier is
defective
Contact customer service
12 V power supply does
not work in 240 V opera-
tion
12 V power supply
switched off
Switch 12 V power sup-
ply on
Living area battery dis-
connected from the 12 V
power supply
Connect the living area
battery with the 12 V
power supply
Charger module in the
transformer/rectifier or
the auxiliary charging unit
is defective
Contact customer service
240 V automatic circuit
breaker has triggered
Contact customer service
Fuse on the living area
battery is defective
Replace fuse on the liv-
ing area battery
Starter battery is dis-
charged in 12 V opera-
tion
Disconnector relay in the
transformer/rectifier is
defective
Contact customer service
Living area battery dis-
connected from the 12 V
power supply
Connect the living area
battery with the 12 V
power supply
Fault Cause Remedy
187Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Troubleshooting
15
15.5 Light control
No voltage is supplied by
the living area battery
Living area battery is dis-
charged
Charge living area bat-
tery immediately
Total discharge
damages the
battery.
If the vehicle is to be laid
up for a long period, fully
charge the living area
battery beforehand
No output voltage at the
converter ("Power Sta-
tus" LED shows a fault)
Input voltage too high
(rapid flashing)
Check input voltage
Input voltage too low
(slow flashing)
Recharge battery
Check cables and con-
nections
Thermal overload (peri-
odical flashing)
Switch off converter and
appliances, and switch
back on again after ap-
prox. 5 to 10 minutes
Improve ventilation
Short circuit, incorrect
polarity or excessive con-
tinuous load (continuous
lighting)
Switch off the converter
and remove the appli-
ance. If no fault occurs
after switching back on
without an appliance, it is
the appliance that is de-
fective. If the fault still oc-
curs, contact customer
service
Extractor hood does not
work
240 V automatic circuit
breaker is switched off
Switch on the 240 V au-
tomatic circuit breaker
Fuse on the transformer/
rectifier is defective
Replace fuse
Extractor hood defective Contact customer service
Air conditioning unit can-
not be switched on or off
240 V automatic circuit
breaker has triggered
Switch on the 240 V au-
tomatic circuit breaker
Remote control battery is
empty
Change remote control
battery
In most cases, a fault in the light control is due to defective lights or fuses.
Before checking the light control for faults, check the fuses and bulbs.
Fault Cause Remedy
188 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Troubleshooting
15
15.6 Gas system
Fault Cause Remedy
None of the lamps can be
operated
No supply voltage Check voltage supply
fuses
Check power cables for
cable break
Check the connections
on the control unit and on
the power supply
Control unit defective Contact customer service
Single lamp cannot be
operated
Bulb is defective Replace bulb
Cable to the lamp defec-
tive
Check cable for short cir-
cuits or breaks
Inspect the connections
No supply voltage in the
corresponding circuit
Check voltage supply
fuse in the corresponding
circuit
Check power cable in the
corresponding circuit
Check the connections
on the control unit and on
the power supply
Switch does not work Cable defective Check cable for short cir-
cuits or breaks
Check the connections
on the switch and on the
control unit
Switch faulty Contact customer service
In case of a defect of the gas system (gas odour, high gas consumption)
there is danger of explosion! Close regulator tap on the gas bottle imme-
diately. Open doors and windows and ventilate well.
If the gas system is defective: Do not smoke; do not ignite any open
flames, and do not operate electric switches (light switches etc.).
Have the defective gas system repaired by an authorised specialist
workshop.
Fault Cause Remedy
No gas Gas bottle is empty Change gas bottle
Gas isolator tap closed Open the gas isolator tap
Regulator tap on the gas
bottle is closed
Open regulator tap on
the gas bottle
External temperature is
too low (-42 °C for pro-
pane gas, 0 °C for bu-
tane gas)
Wait for higher external
temperatures
Built-in appliance is de-
fective
Contact customer service
189Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Troubleshooting
15
15.7 Cooker
15.7.1 Gas cooker/gas oven
15.7.2 Microwave oven
15.8 Heater/boiler
In the event of a defect contact the nearest customer service workshop of the
relevant appliance manufacturer. The list of addresses is enclosed with the
accompanying appliance documentation. Only authorised qualified personnel
may repair the appliance.
Fault Cause Remedy
Ignition fuse does not op-
erate (flame does not
burn after the control
knobs are released)
Heat-up time is too short Keep control knob
pressed for approx. 15 to
20 seconds after ignition
Ignition fuse is defective Contact customer service
Flame extinguishes when
being reduced to its mini-
mum setting
Thermocouple sensor is
incorrectly set
Correctly reset thermo-
couple sensor (do not
bend). The sensor tip
should protrude by 5 mm
beyond the burner. The
sensor neck should not
be more than 3 mm away
from the burner ring; if
necessary, contact cus-
tomer service
Only qualified personnel may repair the microwave oven. Improper
repairs can cause major risks to the user.
Fault Cause Remedy
Microwave oven does not
cut in
Fuse is defective Replace fuse
Door of the microwave
oven is not properly
closed
Remove foreign bodies
stuck in the door of the
microwave oven and
close door properly
If a fault occurs in the system, the cause is shown on the display.
Fault Cause Remedy
Heater does not ignite
with gas operation
Lack of gas Open regulator tap and
gas isolator tap
Connect a full gas bottle
Heater does not ignite Battery voltage too low Charge battery. If the
battery voltage rises
above 11 V, the heater is
switched on automatical-
ly
190 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Troubleshooting
15
15.9 Refrigerator
In the event of a defect contact the nearest customer service workshop of the
relevant appliance manufacturer. The list of addresses is enclosed with the
accompanying appliance documentation. Only authorised qualified personnel
may repair the appliance
15.9.1 Refrigerator with AES
Heater does not ignite at
240 V electrical operation
No 240 V power supply Switch on the 240 V au-
tomatic circuit breaker
Connect 240 V power
supply
Heater switches off Overheating Allow the heater to cool.
To reset the display, in-
terrupt the 12 V power
supply to the heater and
switch it back on again
Heater running, but no
heat at the convectors
Circulating pump does
not work
Switch on room thermo-
stat
Contact customer service
Heater and circulating
pump running, but no
heat at the convectors
Air in the heating system Bleed hot-water heater
Fault Cause Remedy
Fault Cause Remedy
Indicator lamps "230 V",
"12 V" or "AUTO" are not
lit green
Refrigerator is turned off Switch on the refrigera-
tor with energy selector
switch
No electrical operating
voltage
Connect 240 V power
supply
Let the vehicle engine
run
Switch on or replace the
fuse
Contact a specialist
workshop
Refrigerator does not
switch to 12 V mode dur-
ing the journey
Operating voltage of al-
ternator is not present/
too low
Contact a specialist
workshop
Refrigerator does not
switch on in gas opera-
tion, "GAS" indicator
lamp is not lit yellow
Lack of gas Open regulator tap and
gas isolator tap
Connect a full gas bottle
Cobwebs or burnt resi-
due in the burning cham-
ber
Remove the ventilation
grill on the outside of the
vehicle and clean the
burning chamber
191Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Troubleshooting
15
15.9.2 Kissmann refrigerator
"GAS" indicator lamp
flashes yellow, no gas
Air in the gas pipe Switch off the refrigera-
tor with energy selector
switch
Open regulator tap on
the gas bottle and the
gas isolator tap of the re-
frigerator
Switch on the refrigera-
tor with energy selector
switch. After 10 seconds,
the AES will attempt an-
other ignition
If the "GAS" indicator
lamp flashes yellow
again after approx.
30 seconds, the failure
has not been remedied
yet
Repeat this process two
to three times for ventila-
tion. If the refrigerator
cannot be operated, con-
tact customer services
Fault Cause Remedy
Refrigerator does not
work
Refrigerator is turned off Switch on the refrigera-
tor (external and internal
switch)
No electrical operating
voltage
Connect 240 V power
supply
Let the vehicle engine
run
Check fuse, replace if
necessary
Contact a specialist
workshop
Interior lighting does not
work
Refrigerator is turned off Switch on the refrigera-
tor (external and internal
switch)
Bulb is defective Changing the bulb
Refrigerator does not re-
frigerate correctly
Temperature controller
set too low
Adjust the temperature
controller
Ventilation insufficient Clean the ventilation
slots
Operating noises too
loud
Nearby furniture vibrates Check the attachment or
straighten the refrigerator
Fault Cause Remedy
192 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Troubleshooting
15
15.10 Air conditioning unit
15.11 Dishwasher
Fault Cause Remedy
Air conditioning unit does
not cool
No 240 V power supply Connect 240 V power
supply
Fuse is defective Check fuse and replace if
necessary
Temperature below
16 °C
Temperature has been
set incorrectly
Adjust the temperature
Air filter contaminated Replace air filter
Fault Cause Remedy
Dishwasher does not
start
Dishwasher switched off Switch on the dishwasher
240 V automatic circuit
breaker has triggered
Switch on the 240 V au-
tomatic circuit breaker
240 V operating voltage
too low
Have the 240 V power
supply checked by an au-
thorised specialist work-
shop
Dishwasher door is not
shut properly
Shut the dishwasher door
Water pump is switched
off
Activate water pump (see
chapter 12)
Fuse for water pump is
defective
Replace fuse on the
transformer/rectifier
Button for delayed start is
pressed in
Wait for set time
Dishwasher takes in no
water (Program display
of the selected washing
program flashes. Display
shows as error code: 10)
No water intake Open water tap
Clean filter in inlet hose
Check whether the inlet
hose is bent
Water is not pumped off
at the end of the program
(Program display of the
selected washing pro-
gram flashes. Display
shows as error code: 20)
Door opened before end
of program
Restart the program
No water drainage Check the waste water
system of the vehicle
Cleaning result poor Spray arm stuck Make the spray arm ro-
tatable
Openings on the spray
arm blocked
Clean the spray arm
Filter blocked Clean the filter
Incorrect cleaning agent
dosing
Adjust the dosing
Rinsing liquid empty Top up rinsing liquid
193Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Troubleshooting
15
15.12 Water supply
Fault Cause Remedy
Leakage water inside the
vehicle
A leak has occurred Identify leak, re-connect
water pipes
No water Water tank is empty Replenish drinking water
Drain cock not closed Close drain cock
12 V power supply
switched off
Switch 12 V power sup-
ply on
Fuse of the water pump
is defective
Replace fuse on the
transformer/rectifier
Water pump defective Exchange water pump
(have it exchanged)
Water pipe snapped off Straighten water pipe or
replace
Transformer/rectifier de-
fective
Contact customer service
Water pump switched off
on panel
Switch water pump on
Toilet has no flush water Water tank is empty Replenish drinking water
Fuse for toilet is defective Replace fuse
Display for water and
waste water indicates a
wrong value
Measuring probe in the
waste water or water tank
is soiled
Clean water/waste water
tank
Measuring probe is de-
fective
Replace measuring
probe
Waste water tank cannot
be emptied
Drain cock is clogged Open the cleaning cap
on the waste water tank
and drain the waste wa-
ter. Rinse the waste wa-
ter tank well
Drain on the single lever
mixer tap is clogged
Perlator calcified Unclip the perlator, de-
calcify in vinegar water
(only for products made
from metal)
Water jets on the shower
nozzle clogged
Water jets calcified De-calcify shower nozzle
in vinegar water (only for
products made from met-
al) or rub off soft nozzle
burling
Water drains from the
shower tray slowly or
does not drain at all
The vehicle is not in a
horizontal position
Position the vehicle hori-
zontally
Milkiness of the water Tank filled with dirty wa-
ter
Clean water tank me-
chanically and chemical-
ly; then disinfect and
rinse copiously with
drinking water
Residues in the water
tank or water system
Clean water system me-
chanically and chemical-
ly; then disinfect and
rinse copiously with
drinking water
194 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Troubleshooting
15
15.13 Vacuum toilet (Dometic)
Any change in the taste
or odour of the water
Tank filled with dirty wa-
ter
Clean water system me-
chanically and chemical-
ly; then disinfect and
rinse copiously with
drinking water
Fuel filled into the water
tank by mistake
Clean water system me-
chanically and chemical-
ly; then disinfect and
rinse copiously with
drinking water. If not suc-
cessful: Contact a spe-
cialist workshop
Microbiological deposits
in the water system
Clean water system me-
chanically and chemical-
ly; then disinfect and
rinse copiously with
drinking water
Deposits in the water
tank and/or water-carry-
ing components
Water excessively long in
the water tank and in wa-
ter-carrying components
Clean water system me-
chanically and chemical-
ly; then disinfect and
rinse copiously with
drinking water
Fault Cause Remedy
Fault Cause Remedy
Water does not remain in
toilet bowl
Seal dirty or defective Clean seal or have re-
placed
Water does not flow
properly into the toilet
bowl
Water pressure too low Contact customer service
Water is entering the ve-
hicle
Hose connection loos-
ened
Check connections for
proper seat and tighten
hose clamps
Vacuum pump does not
run
No power present Control power supply (or
have checked)
Vacuum pump runs too
often
Cap or connection not
sealed tightly
Check connections be-
tween toilet and vacuum
(or have checked)
Toilet clogged Improper used Remove blockage
195Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Troubleshooting
15
15.14 Body
Fault Cause Remedy
Flap hinges/door hinges
are difficult to operate
Flap/door hinges are not
sufficiently lubricated
Lubricate flap hinges/
door hinges with acid-
free and resin-free
grease
Hinges/joints in the bath-
room unit/toilet compart-
ment are difficult to
operate/make a grating
noise
Hinges/joints are not suf-
ficiently lubricated
Lubricate hinges/joints
with solvent-free and
acid-free grease
Spray cans
often contain
solvents
Storage compartment
hinges are difficult to op-
erate/make a grating
noise
Storage compartment
hinges are not sufficiently
lubricated
Lubricate storage com-
partment hinges with
acid-free and resin-free
grease
Front bonnet swivel sys-
tem is difficult to operate
Front bonnet swivel sys-
tem is not (sufficiently) lu-
bricated
Lubricate front bonnet
swivel system with acid-
free and resin-free
grease
Heki skylight difficult to
operate
Threaded spindle not lu-
bricated
Lubricate threaded spin-
dle
Threaded spindle defec-
tive
Have threaded spindle
replaced
The authorised dealers and service centres are available for any spare
parts requirement.
196 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Troubleshooting
15
197Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Special equipment
16
16Special equipment
16.1 Weight details for special equipment
Weight details for Dethleffs special equipment are listed in the table below. If
these objects are either carried in or on the vehicle and are not part of the
standard equipment, they must be taken into consideration when calculating
the payload.
All weight details are approximate.
Observe the max. permissible gross weight.
The use of accessories, parts and fittings not supplied by Dethleffs may
cause damage to the vehicle and jeopardize road safety. Even if an
expert's report, a general type approval or a design certification exists,
there is no guarantee for the proper quality of the product.
Every alteration of the original condition of the vehicle can alter road
behaviour and jeopardize road safety.
No liability can be assumed for damage caused by products which have
not been released by Dethleffs. This also applies to impermissible alter-
ations to the vehicle.
Item designation Surplus weight (kg)
Caravan coupling 26
External shower (cold water) 1
Automatic transmission 5
Car radio and CD 2
Oven 14
Battery 220 Ah „Gel“ battery 25
Skylight 1
Roof rail 10
Roof rack with aluminium ladder 17
"Kissenschlacht" (pillow fight) decoration package 1
Extractor hood 2
DuoControl switching facility (incl. 11 kg gas bottle) 26
Bike rack for 2 bicycles in rear garage 3
Bike rack for 3 bicycles 9
Bike rack for 4 bicycles 10
Flat screen 5
External gas socket 1
Holder for flat screen 5
Heki 3 15-22
Insect screen, conversion door 3
Insulation mat for driver's cabin window 1
Air conditioning unit 32
Refrigerator, separate freezer compartment 20
Pneumatic spring 30
Awning, 450 cm 32
198 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Special equipment
16
Awning, 500 cm 36
Awning, electric, 550 cm 65
Awning, electric, 600 cm 75
Microwave oven 15
Navigation system 2
Crossbeams and ladder for roof rail 7
Radio preparation 1
Reversing camera 5
Satellite unit 15-23
Switch for water pump 1
Service flap 3
Safety kit 15
Solar installation 15
Transformer for air conditioning unit 3
Fabric panelling, inside 2
Rear supports (2 pcs.) 6
Thetford spare cassette 2
Sill 3
Cables for reversing camera 3
Awning light 1
Hazard warning triangle and first-aid kit 2
Winter covering for the refrigerator grating 1
Auxiliary battery 95 Ah 27
Additional heater, driver's cabin (independent vehicle
heater)
7
Auxiliary lamps, inside 2
Additional pump 240 V (Alde heater) 1
Item designation Surplus weight (kg)
199Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Helpful notes
17
17Helpful notes
Chapter overview
This chapter contains helpful tips for the journey.
The instructions address the following topics:
road assistance in European countries
traffic rules in European countries
gas supply in European countries
toll regulations in European countries
safe ways to spend the night during travel
camping in winter
At the end of the chapter there is a checklist containing the most important
equipment for the journey.
17.1 Traffic rules in foreign countries
Information about traffic regulations is especially important as state law
applies in case of damage. For your own safety, always observe the following
rules when travelling abroad:
Take the green insurance card with you.
Always register accidents with the police.
Never sign documents that you have not read and understood completely.
17.2 Help on Europe's roads
The vehicle driver is required to inform himself as to the traffic rules of the
countries in which he plans to travel before beginning the trip. Contact your
automobile club or embassy for further information.
In some European countries, warning vests must be worn when exiting the
vehicle outside of towns in the case of vehicle failures or accidents.
Country Emergen-
cy services
Police
Breakdown service
Belgium 112
112
TCB Brussels 0 70 34 47 77
Bulgaria 150
166
UAB (02) 9 80 33 08/146
1)
Denmark 112
free of charge
112
free of charge
Falck 79 42 42 42
Germany 112
110
ADAC 22 22 22
1)
Estonia 112
110/112
1)
EESTI (0) 6 97 91 88/18 88
1)
Finland 112
112
Helsinki (09) 77 47 64 00
France
15/112
1)
17/112
1)
Lyon (08) 25 80 08 22
AIT-Assistance 0800 08 92 22
200 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Helpful notes
17
Greece 112
171/112
1)
ELPA 104 00
Great Britain 112
112
AA (08 00) 0 28 90 18/
(08 00) 82 82 82
1)
Ireland
999/112
1)
999/112
1)
AA Dublin 18 00 66 77 88
Iceland 112
112
F.I.B 5 11 21 12
Italy
118/112
1)
112
ACI 803 116/8 00 11 68 00
1)
Croatia
94/112
1)
92/112
1)
HAK 9 87/ 0 19 87
1)
Latvia
03/112
1)
02/112
1)
LAMB 8 00 00 00
Lithuania
03/112
1)
02/112
1)
LAS 8 80 00 00 00/18 88
1)
Luxembourg 112
113/112
1)
ACL 2 60 00
Macedonia 194
192
AMSM 196
Montenegro 94
92
AMSCG 9807
Netherlands 112
112
ANWB 08 82 69 28 88
Norway 113
112
NAF 81 00 05 05
Austria
144/112
1)
133/112
1)
ÖAMTC 120
Poland
999/112
1)
997/112
1)
PZM 022 5 32 84 33
Portugal 112
112
ACP Lissab. (21) 9 42 91 03
ACP Porto (22) 8 34 00 01
Romania
961/112
1)
955/112
1)
ACR (021) 2 22 22 22/
(021) 2 22 15 53
1)
Russia 03
02
RAS (4 95) 7 47 66 66
Sweden 112
112
M 0 20 91 29 12
Country Emergen-
cy services
Police
Breakdown service
201Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Helpful notes
17
Date 03/2007
Specifications without guarantee
17.3 Speed limits and permissible dimensions
For information, the speed limits (in km/h) and permissible dimensions (in m)
of the countries visited most:
Switzerland 144
117/112
1)
TCS 1 40/03 18 50 53 11
1)
Serbia 94
92
AMSS (011) 19800
Slovakia
155/112
1)
158/112
1)
SATC 1 81 24
Slovenia 112
113
AMZS (1) 9 87/
(003861) 5 30 53 53
1)
Spain 061
112
RACE 9 15 93 33 33
Czech Republic
155/112
1)
158/112
1)
UAMK CR 12 30
Turkey 112
155/112
1)
TTOK (02 12) 2 82 81 40
Ukraine 03
02
112 UA (8-032) 2 97 81 12
Hungary
104/112
1)
107/112
1)
MAK
1 88/(0036-1) 13 45 17 44
1)
Cyprus 112
112
AA 02 22 31 31 31
1)
In the mobile communication network
Country Emergen-
cy services
Police
Breakdown service
Please always observe the speed limits in the individual countries.
202 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Helpful notes
17
Country Max. dimen-
sions in me-
ters
Gross
weight
In
built-
up ar-
eas
Outside
built-up ar-
eas
Motor-
way
Width Lgth.
Belgium 2.55 12 Up to 7.5 t
Over 7.5 t
50
50
90/120
1)
60/90
1)
120
90
Bulgaria 2.60 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
90
70
130
100
Denmark 2.55 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
80
70
130
80
Germany 2.55 12 Up to 3.5 t
3.5 t up to
7.5 t
Over
7.5 t
2)
50
50
50
100
80
80
130
3)
100
80
Estonia 2.50 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
90
70
110
70
Finland 2.60 12 50
80
4)
80
4)
France 2.55 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
90
5)
/-
80
5)
/
100
1) 5)
130
5)
110
5)
Greece 2.50 12 50
90/110
11)
120
Great Brit-
ain
2.55 12 48
96/112
1)
112
Ireland 2.55 12 50
60/100
1)
120
Iceland 2.55 12 50
90
6)
–
Italy 2.50 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
90/110
1) 7)
80
130
7)
100
Croatia 2.55 12 50
90/110
1)
130
Latvia 2.50 12 Up to 7.5 t
Over 7.5 t
50
50
90/100
11)
80
110
80
Lithuania 2.50 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
90
70
110
70
Luxem-
bourg
2.55 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
90
8) 7)
75
7)
130
8) 7)
90
7)
Macedo-
nia
2.50 12 40/60 80 80
Montene-
gro
2.50 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
80/100
1)
80
100
80
Nether-
lands
2.55
9)
12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
80/100
1)
80
120
80
Norway 2.55 12.40 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
80/90
1)
80
90
80
203Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Helpful notes
17
Austria 2.55 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
100
70
130
10)
80
Poland 2.50 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
90/100
1)
70/80
1)
130
80
Portugal 2.50 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
90/100
11)
80/90
11)
120
12)
110
12)
Romania 2.50 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
80/90
1)
80/90
1)
120
110
Russia 2.50 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
60
60
90
13)
70
110
13)
90
13)
Sweden 2.60
24
14)
Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
70-110
1) 11)
80/90
1)
110
90
Switzer-
land
2.55 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over
3.5 t
15)
50
50
80/100
1)
80/100
1)
120
100
Serbia
and Mon-
tenegro
2.50 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
60
60
80/100
1)
80
100
80
Slovakia 2.50 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
60
60
90
80
130
80
Slovenia 2.55 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
80/100
1)
80
100
80
Spain 2.55 12 50
70/80
1)
90
Czech Re-
public
2.50 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
90
80
130
80
Turkey 2.50 10 50 80 90
Ukraine 2.50 12 60
90
13)
110
13)
Hungary 2.50 12 Up to 2.5 t
Over 2.5 t
50
50
90/110
1)
70
130
80
Cyprus 2.55 12 50 80 100
1)
On expressways, on roads with more than one lane in each direction
2)
Vehicles over 7.5 tons max. permissible weight require a tachograph
3)
Recommended speed: 130 km/h
4)
Since 1995, for the first time, vehicles up to an unladen weight of 1875 kg and vehi-
cles up to 3.5 t perm gross weight with appropriate equipment (ABS, driver airbag,
seat belts on all seats) can drive max. 100 km/h
5)
On wet roads, reduce speed by 10 km/h, on motorways by 20 km/h
6)
On unmade roads (gravel): 80 km/h
7)
In wet conditions, reduce speed by 20 km/h
8)
Drivers who don't have their driver's licence for the full year, must not drive faster
than max. 75 km/h when out of town or 90 km/h on motorways
Country Max. dimen-
sions in me-
ters
Gross
weight
In
built-
up ar-
eas
Outside
built-up ar-
eas
Motor-
way
Width Lgth.
204 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Helpful notes
17
Date 06/2008
Source: ADAC
Specifications without guarantee
17.4 Driving with low beam in European countries
17.5 Sleeping in the vehicle away from camping areas
9)
On main roads 2.55 m, on roads marked "B" 2.20 m
10)
Between 10 p.m. and 5 a.m. the speed limit on the following motorways is
100 km/h: A10 (Tauernautobahn), A12 (Inntalautobahn), A13 (Brennerautobahn),
A14 (Rheintalautobahn)
11)
According to traffic signs
12)
Drivers who have had their driver's licence for less than one year must not drive
faster than 90 km/h. Corresponding stickers (available from ACP offices) must be
affixed in a clearly visible position on the rear of the vehicle
13)
Drivers who have had their driver's licence for less than two years must not drive
faster than 70 km/h
14)
Swedish campsites often require the motorhome to have a closed waste water
system
15)
A heavy goods vehicle supplement must be paid on all roads for all vehicles
exceeding 3.5 tons max. permissible weight
In many European countries, it is compulsory to drive with the vehicle's
lights on even during the day. Regulations vary between countries.
Motoring organisations or consulates can provide you with the relevant
information.
Country Sleeping on
roads and
fields
Sleeping on
privately
owned
lands
Comments
Yes No Yes No
Belgium X X On highway rest areas
max. 24 hours permitted
Bulgaria X X
Denmark X X On streets and squares only up
to 11 hours with a parking disc
Germany X X Staying overnight for one night
to restore driving ability is per-
mitted. There may be regional
and local limitations
Finland X X Possible with the permission of
the land owner
France X X Permission from the local au-
thorities or the owner of the land
is required. Parking and staying
overnight on free areas is pro-
hibited
Greece X X Staying overnight for one night
at designated areas on the na-
tional route Patras-Athens-
Thessaloniki is permitted
Great Britain X X
205Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Helpful notes
17
Ireland X X
Italy X X Staying overnight for one night
at car parks and service stations
is allowed. Observe the local
regulations. Parking and staying
overnight on free areas is pro-
hibited
Croatia X X
Luxembourg X X
Macedonia X X
Netherlands X X Overnight stays on streets and
squares is allowed in some bor-
oughs
Norway X X Officially prohibited on rest are-
as and cultivated grounds. Trav-
elling on dirt roads is prohibited
Austria X X Staying overnight for one night
to restore driving ability is per-
mitted, but not in nature re-
serves. Observe regional and
local restrictions. Generally for-
bidden in Tyrol
Poland X X Requires property owner's per-
mission
Portugal X X Staying overnight for one night
on motorway service stations
and car parks under 10 hours
are tolerated
Romania X X
Russia X X
Sweden X X Not on agriculture areas or in
the vicinity of houses. Driving on
open fields is prohibited
Switzerland X X One overnight stay at highway
rest areas and in some cantons
is tolerated
Serbia and
Montenegro
X X
Slovakia X X Overnight stays on private land
are only allowed if a toilet is
present
Slovenia X X
Spain X X Some regional prohibitions ap-
ply, especially on beaches
Czech Repub-
lic
X X Overnight stays on private land
are only allowed if a toilet is
present
Country Sleeping on
roads and
fields
Sleeping on
privately
owned
lands
Comments
Yes No Yes No
206 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Helpful notes
17
Specifications without guarantee
17.6 Gas supply in European countries
General tips Always observe the following instructions:
Only go on vacation with completely filled gas bottles.
Use all of the gas bottles' capacity.
Take along adapter sets (available in camping supply stores) for filling gas
bottles in foreign countries and for connecting the gas pressure regulator
to foreign gas bottles.
During the cold time of the year observe filling with propane gas component
(butane does not gas below 0 °C).
Use blue bottles from the firm Campingaz (distributed world-wide). Only
use gas bottles with safety valves.
When bottles from other countries are used, check the gas bottle compart-
ments to see if the gas bottles fit into them. Gas bottles from other countries
do not always display the same size as your own gas bottles.
17.7 Toll regulations in European countries
Many European countries have introduced a mandatory toll system. The toll
regulations and how they are collected vary greatly from country to country.
Nevertheless, ignorance is no excuse. Penalties can be quite severe.
As is the case with traffic regulations, the vehicle driver is required to be
familiar with the toll formalities before starting out on a trip. For example, in
Austria the vignette does not meet the toll requirements for vehicles that weigh
more than 3.5 t. There, a so-called "Go-Box" must be obtained and charged.
Contact your automobile club or the Internet for further information.
17.8 Tips on staying overnight safely during travel
Prudent behaviour is the most important protective measure for insuring a safe
night in the motorhome.
Turkey X X
Ukraine X X
Hungary X X Staying overnight on privately
owned land is permitted only
with police certification
Country Sleeping on
roads and
fields
Sleeping on
privately
owned
lands
Comments
Yes No Yes No
In Europe, there are several different connection systems for gas bottles. It
is not always possible to fill or exchange your gas bottles in a foreign
country. Get information about the connection system in the country you
are travelling to before embarking on your journey, e.g. at a motoring club
or in the trade press.
Windscreens with solar filters can affect the functioning of automatic toll
collection systems (e.g. Go-Box). This must be taken into account when
acquiring the appropriate device (e.g. Split-Go-Box).
207Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Helpful notes
17
The risk of thievery is reduced to a minimum when the following basic rules
are observed:
Before commencing the journey, close and lock all windows, doors and
skylights.
During high season do not spend the night at highway rest stops or parking
areas located along typical vacation routes.
Several vehicles on one site at the same time do not necessarily decrease
the chances of thievery occurring. Consult your own feelings about the
parking site.
Even if it is just for one night, go to a camping site.
When parking on open space keep emergency routes clear. The way to the
driver's seat should be clear. The ignition key should always be within
reach.
Only take with you those valuables which are absolutely necessary for the
journey. If possible, store valuables in a small safe and not in the immediate
vicinity of windows or doors.
Always lock up the vehicle.
17.9 Tips for winter campers
The following tips will help make your winter camping experience as agreeable
as possible.
Reserve your parking place in good time. Good winter camping sites are
often booked up early.
Do not start your trip without winter tyres.
Bring snow chains.
Choose your parking place with care. Observe the ground beneath you.
Snow and ice may melt.
When the vehicle has been positioned, release the handbrake to prevent
freezing.
No snow walls should be allowed to cover the built-in forced ventilation.
Keep the built-in forced ventilation free from snow and ice.
Make sure the air circulation is good. Good air circulation prevents mois-
ture from collecting and makes it easier to heat the living area.
Cover the single-paned driver's cabin window with insulation mats to avoid
thermal bridges.
Follow the instructions in the section "Gas supply in European countries".
Use a two-bottle system with automatic controller for the gas system, so
that the supply does not run out during the night.
Only operate the gas system using propane gas.
Do not use the space behind the heater as a storage compartment.
Never operate catalytic ovens or infra-red gas radiators in the interior of the
vehicle, since they consume oxygen for burning.
Lay the 240 V power cable in such a way that the cable cannot be frozen
or be damaged (e.g. during snow removal).
When it is snowing heavily, clear the roof of the vehicle of snow regularly.
A few centimetres of powdery snow serves as insulation, but wet snow
quickly becomes a heavy burden.
Before embarking on the return journey, remove all the snow from the roof
to avoid impeding vehicles behind you with a "snow flag".
17.10 Travel checklists
The following checklists will help that nothing important is left at home
although not everything on the checklists might be necessary.
208 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Helpful notes
17
Do not leave checking of documents (e.g. vehicle papers and information)
as well as checking the condition of the vehicle until just before com-
mencing the trip. Planning and checking documents well in advance will
save unnecessary trouble.
Object Object Object
Kitchen area
Wiping cloth Cleansing agent
(detergent)
Salad servers
Mug Dishcloths Chopping board
Turnspit Set of knifes and
forks for grilling
Bowls
Can opener Coffeepot Brush to wash the
dishes
Egg-cup Corkscrew Cloth to wash the
dishes
Ice cube tray Kitchen paper Matches
Lighter Spoons Cups
Bottle opener Knifes Plates
Air-tight storage
boxes
Garbage bags Thermos jug
Breakfast plate Frying pans Pots
Forks Stirring spoons Glasses
Bathroom/sanitary
items
Towels Toilet brush Toothbrush glass
Sanitary items Toilet paper
Living area
Dustbin Insect lamp Rain clothes
Road atlas Insect repellent First aid kit
Bath towels Deck of cards Travel guides/park-
ing guide
Bath shoes Broom Rucksack
Batteries Candles Sleeping bags
Bed sheets Dust pan Pencils and paper
Bed linen Coat-hangers Shoes
Laundry bag Clothes brush Shoe polish
Books Pillow Vacuum cleaner
Camping guide Map Flash light
Spare bulbs Medicine Pocket knife
Water bottle Music cassettes Table cloth
Binoculars Neck-supporting
pillow
Clothes pins
Fire extinguisher Sewing kit Clothesline
Gas bottle Radio
209Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Helpful notes
17
Vehicle/tools
Waste water con-
tainer
Fabric tape Screwdriver
Adapter socket Watering can for
drinking water
Current-measuring
instrument
CEE adapter Cable reel Step
Wire V-belt Wheel chocks
Spare wheel Glue First-aid kit
Spare lamps Universal pliers Vehicle jack
Spare fuses Compressor Hazard warning tri-
angle
Replacement wa-
ter pump
Luster terminals Warning sign
Hammer Loops Warning vest
Flat wrench Tube adapter Flashing hazard
warning light
Gas filling adapter Hose clips
Gas tube Snow chains (win-
ter)
Outside
Stay rope Camping table Lock
Bellows Luggage racks String
Camping chairs Grill Tent pegs/tighten-
ing ropes
Documents
List of addresses Registration book Identity card
Registration confir-
mation(s)
Driving licence Passport
Allergy certificate Green insurance
card
Writ of protection
Instruction manuals Vaccination certifi-
cate
Vignette/toll card
Instruction leaflets
for medicines
Credit card Visa
Object Object Object
210 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Helpful notes
17
211Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Index
12 V fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
For toilet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
On the living area battery
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
On the starter battery
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
12 V main switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
12 V power supply
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
240 V automatic circuit breaker
. . . . . . . . . . . . 122
240 V connection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 119
Power cable
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
240 V indicator lamp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
240 V power supply
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
A
AC converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Access ladder, overcab bed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Access ladder, pull-down bed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Accessories, fitting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Adapter cable
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Additional equipment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Add-on parts see special equipment
. . . . . . . . . 20
Air conditioning unit
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Maintenance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Position
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Remote control
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Timer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Appliances
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Manuals
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Automatic power selection (AES)
. . . . . . . . . . 134
Auxiliary charging unit
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Position
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Awning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Awning light, remote control
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
B
Basic equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Battery alarm
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Battery monitor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Battery see starter battery and
living area battery
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Battery selector switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Battery separation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Battery voltage, displaying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Beds
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Before the journey
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Bike rack
Load
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Travelling with a loaded bike rack
. . . . . . . . 33
Blind, cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Blind, driver's cabin
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Blind, skylight with snap latch
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Blind, window
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Boiler (Alde)
Emptying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Safety instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Water, filling with
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Bonnet
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Brakes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Check
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 183
Braking system, troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . 183
Breakdown services in Europe
. . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Bulbs, changing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Garage light
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Halogen spotlight
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Recessed halogen light
. . . . . . . . . . . 172, 173
Refrigerator light
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Wardrobe light
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Butane gas
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 96
C
Cable reel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Camping gas bottles, use
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 97
Camping in winter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Canopy light, entrance step
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Capacity of the battery
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Caravan coupling
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Blind
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Carpet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Curtains
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Driver's cabin insulation mat
. . . . . . . . . . . 157
Index
212 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Electrical-hydraulic steady legs . . . . . . . . . 157
Entrance step
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
External care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Extractor hood
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Furniture surfaces
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Gas cooker
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
High-pressure cleaner, washing with
. . . . . 155
Hot-water heater
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
In the winter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Insect screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Interior care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Lamps
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Net curtains
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
PVC-floor covering
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Roman shade
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Seat belt
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Sink
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Synthetic parts, interior
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Teflon coverings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Temporary lay-up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Toilets
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Underbody
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Upholstery
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Washing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Waste water tank
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Water system
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Windows
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Winter lay-up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Carpet, cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Central locking system, kitchen unit
. . . . . . . . . . 38
Locking
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Unlocking
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Central seating group
Extending
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87, 88
Sleeping conversion
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93, 94
Changing wheels
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Checklist
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 162
Before the journey
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
For the journey
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Initial start-up after temporary lay-up
. . . . . 165
Road safety
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Temporary lay-up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Winter lay-up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Children's beds
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 90
Circulating pump, setting the
rotational speed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Cleaning
Water pipes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Water tank
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Cleaning see care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Closed circuit current
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Condensation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
On the double acrylic glass pane
. . . . . . . . .71
On the screwed connections in the floor
. . . .70
Condensation water see condensation
. . . . . . . .71
Connecting cable see power cable
. . . . . . . . . .119
Conventional load
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Conversion door
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 65, 66
Insect screen, closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Insect screen, opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Roman shade, closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Roman shade, opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Window, closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Window, opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Conversion door, inside
Locking
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Conversion door, outside
Locking
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Cooker
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Cooling water, refilling
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Curtains, cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
D
Danger of suffocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20, 70
Dimensions, permissible
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Dishwasher
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Displays
Battery voltage
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Electrical steady legs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Electrical-hydraulic steady legs
. . . . . . . . . .59
Temperature
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Time
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Waste water tank level
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Water tank level
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Disposal
Household waste
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Sewage
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Waste water
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Door lock
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
213Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Index
Doors
Conversion door
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Lock
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Double floor, load
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Drain cock, waste water
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Drain cock, water
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Drain cocks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149, 150
Drain neck
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147, 148
Drinking water
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Drinking water filler neck
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Driver's cabin insulation mat, care
. . . . . . . . . 157
Driver's cabin partition
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 70
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 70
Driver's seat
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Armrest, adjustment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Backrest, adjustment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Cushioning, adjustment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Lumbar support, adjusting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Moving in lengthways direction
. . . . . . . . . . 44
Seat depth, adjustment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Seat heater, switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Seat height, adjustment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Seat inclination, adjustment
. . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Turning it to driving position
. . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Driving speed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Driving the motorhome
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
DuoControl switching facility
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Duomatic switching facility
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
During the journey
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
E
Electrical steady legs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Displays
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Remote control
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Warning tone
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Electrical system
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
240 V connection, troubleshooting
. . . . . . 185
Entrance step, troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . 185
Explanation of terms
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Lighting, troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Safety instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Electrical-hydraulic steady legs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Displays
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Operation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Electrically adjustable external mirrors
. . . . . . . 47
Entrance step
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 55
Care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Extending
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Retracting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Warning tone
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Environmental tips
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Exterior lighting
Checking
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
External care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
External connection see 240 V connection
. . . . 60
External flaps
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Flap lock
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 68
Sliding drawer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 69
External gas connection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
External mirrors, electrically adjustable
Adjusting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Mirror heater, switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Extractor hood
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Filter, cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
F
Fault current protection switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Filling the tank
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Fire
Behaviour in the event of
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Extinguishing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Fire prevention
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Fire risks, avoidance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Fixed bed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Fixed table
Moving in a crossways direction
. . . . . . . . . 82
Moving in a lengthways direction
. . . . . . . . . 82
Flap lock
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 68
With recessed handle
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
With separate locking cylinder
. . . . . . . . . . . 68
Flat screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Flat screen, positioning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 84
Fluorescent tubes, changing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Room lamp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Folding mechanism, overcab bed
. . . . . . . . . . . 89
Forced ventilation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 70
Index
214 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Freezer compartment door locking mechanism
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Locking in the ventilation position
. . . . . . . 138
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Front passenger's seat
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Armrest, adjustment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Backrest, adjustment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Cushioning, adjusting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Lumbar support, adjusting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Moving in lengthways direction
. . . . . . . . . . 44
Seat depth, adjustment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Seat heater, switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Seat height, adjustment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Seat inclination, adjustment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Turning it to driving position
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Fuel filler neck
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Furniture flaps, troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Furniture surfaces, cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Fuse box
see 240 V automatic circuit breaker
. . . . . . . . . 122
Fuses
12 V fuses
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
240 V fuse
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118, 122
For toilet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
On the living area battery
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
On the starter battery
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Fuses see 12 V fuses and 240 V fuse
. . . . . . . 120
G
Garage light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Gas bottle compartment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 96
Gas bottles
Changing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Safety instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 96
Gas connection, external
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Gas consumption
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Gas cooker
Cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Gas isolator taps
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Symbols
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98, 123
Gas odour
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22, 95, 188
Gas oven
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Gas supply in European countries
. . . . . . . . . .206
Gas system
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Defect
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 95, 188
General instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Hose break guard
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Safety instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22, 95
Switching automatics
. . . . . . . . . . . . .100, 102
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Gas tube, check
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 96
Gathered blind
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
General instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Guarantee
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Guarantee certificate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Guarantee conditions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
H
Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Applying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Handling of tyres
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Headrests
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Heat exchanger (Alde)
Switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Heat exchanger, heater, replacement
. . . . . . .123
Heater
Heat exchanger, replacement
. . . . . . . . . . .123
Initial start-up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Heater, external mirrors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Heki skylight
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Insect screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Roman shade
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Ventilation position
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Help on Europe's roads
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
High rate of gas consumption
. . . . . . . 22, 95, 188
High-pressure cleaner, washing with
. . . . . . . .155
Hinged skylight
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Insect screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Locking in ventilation position
. . . . . . . . . . . .78
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Roman shade
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Hinged window
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Continuous ventilation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Hose break guard, gas system
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
215Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Index
Hot-water heater
240 V electrical operation, selecting
. . . . . 125
Adjustment menu
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Auxiliary circulating pump
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Fluid level, checking
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Gas and 240 V electrical operation,
selecting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Gas operation, selecting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Heat exchanger
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Heater, switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Heater, switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Heating fluid, topping up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Heating system, bleeding
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Maintenance work
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Operating unit
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Rotational speed, circulating pump
. . . . . . 127
Safety instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Start screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Tool menus
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
I
Independent vehicle heater
Maintenance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Programming
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Indicator lamp, 240 V power supply
. . . . . . . . 114
Indicator lamp, dishwasher
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Indicator lamp, toilet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Information stickers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Initial start-up
After temporary lay-up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
After winter lay-up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Inner door, troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Insect screen door
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Insect screen, cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Insect screen, Heki skylight
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Insect screen, hinged skylight
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Insect screen, window of conversion door
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Insect screen, windows
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74, 75
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74, 75
Insect screen, wind-up skylight
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Inspection records
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Inspection work
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Inspections
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Inspection plan
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Records
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Interior care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Interior lighting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Bulbs, changing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
K
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Kitchen unit, central locking system
. . . . . . . . . . 38
L
Ladder, overcab bed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Ladder, pull-down bed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Ladder, rear
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Lamps
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84, 171
Cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Operating
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Lay-up
Temporary
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Winter lay-up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Leakage water inside the vehicle
. . . . . . . . . . . 193
Light control
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Light switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85, 86
Lighting
Lamps, cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Lights see bulbs, changing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Living area battery
Battery alarm
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Charging
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Discharging
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Fuses
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Position
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185, 187
Voltage, displaying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Index
216 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Bike rack
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Double floor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Rear garage
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Rear storage space
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Roof rack
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Load rack for roof loads
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Load see also payload
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Lock
Conversion door
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Driver's cabin partition
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
External flap
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 68
Low beam
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
M
Maintenance work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Air conditioning unit
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Electrical-hydraulic steady legs
. . . . . . . . . 168
Hot-water heater
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Independent vehicle heater
. . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Mass in ready-to-drive condition
. . . . . . . . . 27, 28
Maximum permissible gross weight
. . . . . . . 26, 28
Microwave oven
Switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
N
Net curtains, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
No gas
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Nose weight
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
O
Odour seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Off-load voltage
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Operating modes
Refrigerator
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134, 137
Switching automatics,
gas system
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101, 103
Oven see gas cooker or gas oven
. . . . . . 130, 131
Overcab bed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Access ladder
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Folding downwards
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Folding mechanism
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Folding upwards
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Safety net
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Overloading
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
P
Panel (MP 20-T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
12 V main switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
240 V indicator lamp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Alarms
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Battery displays
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Tank display
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Tank heater switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Temperature display
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Time display
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Payload
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Calculation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Composition
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Example calculation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27, 29
Payload see also load
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Permissible gross weight see
maximum permissible gross weight
. . . . . . . . . .26
Permitted mass
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Personal equipment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Plug-in light
Plugging in
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Removing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Rotating
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Pneumatic spring
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Functions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Overheating protection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Pressure, increasing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Pressure, reducing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Remote control
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Safety instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48, 49
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183, 184
Power cable for the 240 V connection
. . . . . . .119
Propane gas
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 96
Pull-down bed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Access ladder
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Lifting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Lowering
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Safety net
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
PVC-floor covering
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
PVC-floor covering, cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
R
Rear axle load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Rear garage
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Rear ladder
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Folding downwards
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Folding upwards
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Rear storage space
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Recessed halogen light
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .172, 173
217Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Index
Refrigerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Change-over between energy sources
. . . 135
Defrosting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Door lock
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Frame heater
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Operating modes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134, 137
Operation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Refrigerating temperature control
. . . . . . . 135
Switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136, 137
Switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136, 137
Temperature, adjusting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190, 191
Ventilation grill, removal
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Refrigerator door locking mechanism
Bringing into the ventilation position
. . . . . 139
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138, 139
Locking in the ventilation position
. . . . . . . 138
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138, 139
Refrigerator light
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Refrigerator ventilation grill, removal
. . . . . . . . 134
Registration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Remote control, air conditioning unit
. . . . . . . . 139
Remote control, awning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Remote control, awning light
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Remote control, canopy light
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Remote control, electrical steady legs
. . . . . . . . 57
Remote control, entrance step
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Remote control, pneumatic spring
. . . . . . . . . . . 49
Reversing camera
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Risk of frost damage
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 145, 150
Road safety
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Checklist
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Notes for
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Roman shade, cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Roman shade, driver's cabin
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Roman shade, Heki skylight
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Roman shade, hinged skylight
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Roman shade, side pane
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Roman shade, window of conversion door
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Roman shade, windows
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Roman shade, wind-up skylight
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Roof load
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Roof rack, load
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Roof rail
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Room lamp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
S
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Cooker
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Electrical system
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Fire prevention
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Gas bottles
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Gas system
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 95
Hot-water heater
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Road safety
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Towing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Water system
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Safety knob, hinged window
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Safety net, overcab bed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Safety net, pull-down bed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Sanitary fittings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Seat belts
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Fastening correctly
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Seating arrangement
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Seating groups
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Seats, rotating
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Serial number
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Shower
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Sink, cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Skylight with snap latch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Blind
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Skylights
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76, 78
Sleeping conversion,
central seating group
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92, 93, 94
Sliding drawer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 69
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Sliding window
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72, 73
Snow chains
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Spare parts
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Spare wheel
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Spare wheel support
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Special equipment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Index
218 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Marking
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Safety instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Weight details
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Speed limits
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Spotlight
Shifting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Swivelling
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Starter battery
Battery alarm
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Charging
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Fuses
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Voltage, displaying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Staying overnight
Away from camping areas
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
During travel
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Steady legs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Extending
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Retracting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Steady legs, electrical
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Displays
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Remote control
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Warning tone
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Steady legs, electrical-hydraulic
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Displays
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Maintenance work
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Operation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Sun visor
Extending
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Retracting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Suspension table
Conversion to bed foundation
. . . . . . . . . . . 82
Table extension, folding
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Table surface, extending
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Table surface, reducing size
. . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Switching automatics, gas system
. . . . . . 100, 102
Symbols
For instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Gas isolator taps
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98, 123
Synthetic parts in the toilet and living areas,
cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
T
Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Table extension
Table surface, extending
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Table surface, reducing size
. . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Tank alarm
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Tank heater, switching on and off
. . . . . . . . . . .118
Tank lid see fuel filler neck
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Teflon coverings, cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Television
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36, 83
Positioning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Pulling out
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Storing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Swiveling
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Temperature display
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Thetford cassette, retaining clip
. . . . . . . . . . . .154
Time, displaying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Tips
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Toilet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Flushing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Fuse
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Indicator lamp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Toilet cassette
Emptying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Removing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Unlocking
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Toilet compartment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Ventilation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Toll regulations in European countries
. . . . . . .206
Total discharge
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Towing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
General instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Safety instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Traffic rules in foreign countries
. . . . . . . . . . . .199
Transformer/rectifier (EBL 220)
. . . . . . . . . . . .110
Functions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Position
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Travel checklists
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Travel cots suitable for children
. . . . . . . . . .88, 90
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
12 V power supply
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
240 V connection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
AC converter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Air conditioning unit
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Battery
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Body
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Braking system
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
Cooker
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Dishwasher
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Electrical system
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Electrical-hydraulic steady legs
. . . . . . . . .185
219Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Index
Entrance step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Extractor hood
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Furniture flaps
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Gas cooker
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Gas oven
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Gas system
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Heater
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Inner door
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Light control
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Lighting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Living area battery
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Microwave oven
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Pneumatic spring
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183, 184
Refrigerator
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190, 191
Starter battery
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Toilet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Vacuum toilet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Water supply
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
TV cabinet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Tyre change see changing wheels
. . . . . . . . . 179
Tyre specifications
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Tyres
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Excessive wear
. . . . . . . . . . . 21, 39, 177, 181
General instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Handling
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Identification
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Load-carrying capacity
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Tyre pressure
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Tyre selection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
U
Underbody, maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Unladen weight
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Upholstery, cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
V
Vacuum cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Blow-out filter, changing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Dust bag, changing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Filter, changing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Hose, connecting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Intake opening, activating
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Motor filter, changing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Vacuum toilet
Flushing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Indicator lamps
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Putting into operation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Valve, emptying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Vehicle identification plate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Vehicle manuals and documents
. . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Vehicle, washing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Ventilation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Toilet compartment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Volume of waste water, displaying
. . . . . . . . . . 117
Volume of water, displaying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
W
Wardrobe light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Warning stickers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Warning tone, electrical steady legs
. . . . . . . . . 57
Washer fluid, filling
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Washing with a high-pressure cleaner
. . . . . . . 155
Waste water tank
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Emptying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Filling level, displaying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Water drainage
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Water pipes, cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Water pump
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145, 149
Water supply
General
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Water system
Care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Disinfect
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Drinking water filler neck
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Emptying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Filling
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Safety instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Water tank
Cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Filling level, displaying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Water drainage
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Water, draining
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Water, filling with
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Water tank see also water system
. . . . . . . . . . 146
Weatherproof guarantee
Conditions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Inspection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Inspection plan
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Inspection stamp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Weight details for special equipment
. . . . . . . . 197
Index
220 Globetrotter - 09-09 - DET-0047-05EN
Wheel chocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Wheel rim size
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Wheel rim type
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Wheels
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Window, conversion door
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Insect screen, closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Insect screen, opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Roman shade, closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Roman shade, opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Windows
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Blind
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73, 75
Cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Gathered blind
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Insect screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73, 74
Roman shade
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74, 76
Wind-up skylight
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Insect screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Roman shade
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Winter care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Winter operation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
1 …

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Dethleffs 2010 Motorhome Premium Class bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Dethleffs 2010 Motorhome Premium Class in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 3,6 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info